Owners Manual Pdf TX0707OM

User Manual: Owners Manual Pdf 2007 Acura MDX Owners Manual Pdf | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 479

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2007 Acura MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance..................................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 61
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 167
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 315
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 329
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 373
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 417
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 443
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 459
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 463
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

０６／０８／０２

０９：５９：４１

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００１

Main Menu

Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

OWNER

This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the MDX. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

STATE/PROVINCE

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE

The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME

DEALER NO.

ADDRESS
STREET

CITY

OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STATE/PROVINCE

ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33STXC00

０６／０８／０２

０９：５９：４７

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００２

Main Menu

Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Acura MDX was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

０６／０８／０２

０９：５９：５１

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００３

Main Menu

Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices
record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag
system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally
required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling
may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

０６／０８／０２

１０：００：０２

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００４

Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

iii

０６／０８／０２

１０：００：０７

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００５

Main Menu

Important Handling Information
Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 330 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 369 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.

０６／０８／０２

１２：４１：５２

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００８

Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.63)
GAUGES (P.72)

HomeLink BUTTONS
(P.272)

MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.150)

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.155)

PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.9, 34)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.130)

CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.168)

PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.151)

AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.178)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.147)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.333)

FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.317)

REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.173)

POWER TAILGATE
BUTTON＊ (P.132)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.319)

＊: If equipped

MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON＊
(P.153)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG(P.9, 27)

PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL (P.151)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS＊
(P.263)

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS＊
(P.264)

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：００：５０

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０００９

Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HEADLIGHT WASHER
SWITCH＊
(P.117)

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(P.118)

STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.229)

WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.116)

VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH
(P.352)

HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.122)

MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.153)

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.122)

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.155)

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.164)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.130)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.151)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.147)
POWER TAILGATE
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON BUTTON＊
(P.132)
(P.317)

SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
(P.146)

HORN＊1

HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.319)

STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.124)

＊: If equipped
＊1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.123)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.34)

CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.266)

ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH＊
(P.353)

０６／０８／０２

１０：００：５４

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１０

Main Menu

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 12
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 13
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 14
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19

Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 20
Seat Belt System Components ... 20
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 24
Airbag System Components ....... 24
How Your Front Airbags Work ......... 27
Advanced Airbag ......................... 29
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33
How The Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 33
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 34
Airbag Service .............................. 35
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 37
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 37

All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 38
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 38
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 40
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 40
Additional Safety Precautions .... 41
Protecting infants and
Small Children.......................... 42
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 45
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 46
With LATCH ................................ 47
With a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt .. 50
With a Tether ............................... 51
Protecting Larger Children ............ 54
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 54
Using a Booster Seat ................... 55
When Can a Child Sit in Front ... 56
Additional Safety Precautions .... 57
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58
Safety Labels .................................... 59

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains how your
airbags work, and it tells you how to
properly restrain infants and
children in your vehicle.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１１

Table of Contents

Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 15 ).

Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 37 − 57 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 409 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１２

Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

(3)

(1)

(4)

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.

(7)

(6)
(5)

(11)
(2)

(8)
(10)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks

However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

(9)

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１３

Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.

Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１４

Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
27 for more information on how
your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 30 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).

In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page 32 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１５

Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.

They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.

To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.

What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.

The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１６

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
monitor on the multi-information
display to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed. You will see the appropriate
indicator and the message for each
condition.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult
passengers, and teenage children
who are large enough and mature
enough to drive or ride in the front.
See pages 37 − 41 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.

When the tailgate is not tightly
closed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.

1. Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
When one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
message will come on.

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１７

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.

2.Adjust the Front Seats

Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
When both tailgate and one or more
doors are not tightly closed, the
‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.

Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 130 .

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０１：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１８

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 124 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.

Driver and Passenger Safety

If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
See page 140 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００１９

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.

Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 140 for how to adjust the
seat-backs.

Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 141 for how to adjust the
head restraints.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２０

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

The second row center seat, and
both third row seats, have a
detachable shoulder belt that can be
unlatched and retracted, to allow the
seats to be folded down. See page
144 for how to unlatch and relatch
the seat belts.

This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.

Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

If necessary, pull up on the shoulder
belt again to remove any slack, then
check that the belt rests across the
center of your chest and over your
shoulder.

5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２１

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, squeeze the release
button and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).

Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause

very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat

RELEASE
BUTTON

belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２２

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.

Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.

Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２３

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women

If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２４

Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not

wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.

Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp

objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on

the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a

side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they

０６／０８／０２

１０：０２：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２５

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seven seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 29 and 30 ).

The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.

This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).

If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.

０６／０８／０２

１７：２０：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２６

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
back seat, that are touching the
rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 15 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.

All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
lockable retractor that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page 50 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
CONTINUED
needed.

Driver and Passenger Safety

If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:

０６／０８／０２

１２：４２：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２７

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
32 ).
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.

DETACHABLE ANCHOR

The lap/shoulder belts in the center
seat of the second row and both of
the third row seats are equipped with
a detachable anchor that has two
parts: a small latch plate and a
buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 144 .

For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.

The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２８

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.

The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
403 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.

Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on
seat belts. See your Acura Warranty
Information booklet for details.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００２９

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components

(1)

(6)

(11)

(8)

(5)

(2)

(4)
(3)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(10) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(11) SRS Indicator

(5)

(10)

(9)

(7)

(4)

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３０

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

(17)

(16)

(13)

Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ).

(15)
(12) Front Impact Sensors
(13) Side Curtain Airbags
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
(17) Safing Sensor

(14)

Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the roof
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
32 ).
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

(12)

Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 27 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３１

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 22 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 31 ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page 20 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
29 ).

Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 29 ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page 32 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.

An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 33 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 33 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 34 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３２

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.

This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.

If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 29 ).

After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：４８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３３

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.

Dual-Stage Airbags

Dual-Threshold Airbags

Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.

Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.

In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０３：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３４

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Second-row passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.

DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR

The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.

PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR

The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Acura does
not encourage carrying an infant or
small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29
kg), the system will automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３５

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.

Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 34 ).

Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.

If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.

This includes:
A second-row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

Moving the front passenger’s seat
or seat-back forcibly back against
the folded right-side second-row
seat.
Also, make sure the floor mat
behind the front passenger’s seat
is hooked to the floor mat anchor
(see page 404 ). If it is not, the mat
may interfere with the proper
operation of the sensors and
operation of the seat.

If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３６

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
sensors in the seat detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.

If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 33 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.

Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３７

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work

If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.

In a Rollover

If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.

In a Side Impact

In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３８

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
81 ).
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.

How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.

Canada

This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and go out
(see page 66 ). If it does not come on,
stays on, or comes on while driving
without a passenger in the front seat,
you will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display. Have the
system checked (see page 81 ).

If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.

Driver and Passenger Safety

How the SRS Indicator Works
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００３９

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S. Canada

Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.

This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.

If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object, such as a folded-down
back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４０

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag

that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.

If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your

airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.

Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or

another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an

authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:

０６／０８／０２

１０：０４：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４１

Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the

Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing

driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.

or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４２

Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 42 − 53 ).

Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 54 − 57 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety

All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４３

Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in the back are
less likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.

The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 34 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If

the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.

Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 54 for important
information about protecting larger
children.)

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４４

Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
U.S. Models

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

Driver and Passenger Safety

To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

Canadian Models
SUN VISORS

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４５

Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 54 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 12 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 17 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
15 ).

If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４６

Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a

seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.

seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 50 and 51 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)

Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the

Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors. This can prevent children

Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without

from accidentally falling out (see
page 131 ).

adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.

Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young

children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４７

Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants

Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed

facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.

Child Seat Type

An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.

If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
It can also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０５：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４８

Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children

We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.

Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type

Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.

A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００４９

Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement

We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too

far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbags,
which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 34 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.

Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５０

Table of Contents

Selecting a Child Seat

Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the second-row
seats.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS

213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.

Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.

Driver and Passenger Safety

When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５１

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be

secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for a rearfacing child seat.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５２

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.

MARKS

Using the Outer LATCH

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at each of the second
row seats.

LOWER ANCHORS

When you install a child seat in rear
seating position, use the lower
anchors as shown in the illustration.
You can install up to three child
seats at a time with LATCH.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time.

To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either outer second row seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
CONTINUED
anchors.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：３５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５３

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

RIGID TYPE

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.

FLEXIBLE TYPE

Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.

TETHER STRAP

5. Lift the head restraint (see page
141 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０６：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５４

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center LATCH

2. Follow step 1 through 4 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.

4. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the center seating position on
the second row seat, use the center
lower anchors as shown above.

7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.

1. Pull up the cover below the
armrest and find one of the
anchors. The other anchor is
located underneath the flap at the
bottom of the outer seat’s inner
bolster.

Driver and Passenger Safety

3. Lower the head restraint first.
Route the tether strap over the
head restraint and seat-back, then
attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.

０６／０８／０２

１７：３７：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５５

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of second
row seat, make sure the detachable
seat belt is securely latched (see
page144 ).

1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：００

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５６

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：０７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５７

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Second Row Installation
TETHER STRAP

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.

Outer Seating Position

1. After properly securing the child
seat in the desired position (see
page 50 ), lift the head restraint,
then route the tether strap over
the seat-back.

For the center seat, lower the head
restraint, then route the tether strap
over the head restraint and seat-back.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５８

Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat
Third Row Installation

Driver and Passenger Safety

2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point on the tailgate sill.
1. Select the anchor point you want
to use. Then open the anchor
cover with a small flat-tip
screwdriver.

3. Route the tether strap over the
head restraint, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.

2. Secure the child seat in the
desired position (see page 50 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００５９

Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.

Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.

The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.

If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６０

Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?

Using a Booster Seat

5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards and that you
follow the booster seat maker’s
instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?

Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６１

Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.

Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size

Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 15 and 54 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity

A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.

To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：４８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６２

Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:

Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.

Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result

in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could

Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.

cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.

Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.

Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they

Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to

improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.

could be very seriously injured in a
crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.

Additional Safety Precautions

０６／０８／０２

１０：０７：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６３

Table of Contents

Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows,
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６４

Table of Contents

Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

DASHBOARD
U.S. models only

Driver and Passenger Safety

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.

HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

BATTERY LABEL

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６５

Table of Contents

Safety Labels
SUN VISOR

DOORJAMBS

U.S. models
U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：２５

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６６

Main Menu

Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.

Seat Heaters ................................... 146
Power Windows ............................. 147
Moonroof ........................................ 150
Parking Brake ................................ 151
Mirrors ............................................ 152
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 155
Interior Lights ................................ 157
Interior Convenience Items .......... 160
Beverage Holders ...................... 161
Console Compartment .............. 162
Storage Compartment ............... 162
Glove Box ................................... 162
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 163
Cargo Hooks .............................. 163
Sun Visor .................................... 164
Vanity Mirror ............................. 164
Accessory Power Sockets......... 164
AC Power Outlet ........................ 165

Instruments and Controls

Control Locations ............................ 62
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 64
Gauges .............................................. 72
Multi-Information Display .............. 73
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 115
Windshield Wipers and
Washers .................................. 116
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer .................................... 117
Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 118
Hazard Warning Button ................ 122
Rear Window Defogger ................ 122
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 123
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 124
Keys and Locks.............................. 126
Immobilizer System....................... 128
Ignition Switch ............................... 129
Door Locks ..................................... 130
Childproof Door Locks ............. 131
Tailgate ........................................... 131
Power Tailgate ........................... 132
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135
Seats ................................................ 140
Detachable Anchor.................... 144

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６７

Table of Contents

Control Locations

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.155)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.63)
GAUGES (P.72)

HomeLink BUTTONS
(P.272)

MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.150)
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON＊
(P.153)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.130)

CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM (P.168)

PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.151)

AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.178)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.147)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.333)

FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.317)

REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.173)

POWER TAILGATE
BUTTON＊ (P.132)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.319)

＊: If equipped

PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL (P.151)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS＊
(P.263)

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS＊
(P.264)

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００６８

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel

SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.66)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.66)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.431)

LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.68)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR (P.71)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P.70)

SH-AWD INDICATOR
(P.69)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.69)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.68)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.65)
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.70)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.70)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.71)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.65)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67)

＊ : If equipped
＊ : The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instruments and Controls

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P.73)
(P.68)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.64)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.70)
(P.70)
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
INDICATOR＊ (P.71)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.66)

０６／０８／０２ １０：０８：４９ ３１ＳＴＸ６００ ００６９

Main Menu

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.

If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals, and you
will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).
For more information, see page 20 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：０８：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７０

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when
the engine is running, the battery
is not being charged, and you will
also see a ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. For more
information, see page 430 .
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. For
more information, see page 431 .

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. Driving with
the parking brake not fully
released can damage the rear
brakes, axles, and tires.

2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, it can
indicate a problem in the brake
system. You will also see a ‘‘LOW
BRAKE FLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK
BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
pages 81 ). For more information,
see page 432 .

If you drive without releasing the
parking brake, a beeper will sound,
and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 81 ).

Instruments and Controls

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely
damaged if this indicator flashes
or stays on when the engine is
running, or if a ‘‘CHECK ENGINE
OIL LEVEL’’ message is on the
multi-information display. For
more information, see page 430 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７１

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, or automatic seat belt
tensioners. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 81 ). For more
information, see page 33 .

U.S.

Canada

Side Airbag Off Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. You will also
see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG
OFF’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).
For more information, see page 33 .

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on
at any other time, there is a
problem in the ABS. If this
happens, take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 81 ). For more
information, see page 349 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７２

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).
Take your vehicle to a dealer to have
it checked. Without VSA, your
vehicle still has normal driving ability,
but will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. For more
information, see page 351 .
This indicator may also come on if
there is a problem with the trailer
stability assist function (see page
367 ).

VSA Activation Indicator

position. For more information, see
page 351 .

This indicator has four functions.
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 351 ).
3. It flashes when trailer stability
assist is activating (see page 367 ).
4. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message and a
‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
ASSIST’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicator does not
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 398 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signals blink. All
turn signals on the outside of the
vehicle should flash.

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)

Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７３

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 82 ).
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multiinformation display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page 433 .

A/T Temperature
Indicator
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMP
HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 82 ).

Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.

Message Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 73 ) to see the message (see
page 81 ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７４

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
SH-AWD Indicator

Pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out.

Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled. (see page128 ).

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.

Instruments and Controls

This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If this indicator comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the SH-AWD system. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 82 ). Take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.
For more information, see page 340 .

If the indicator blinks while driving,
it indicates the differential
temperature is too high.
You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF
TEMP. HIGH’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
82 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７５

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. This indicator
will also come on when the light
switch is in AUTO and the lights
turn on automatically. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.

Fog Light Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page 120 .

Cruise Main Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 266 ).

High Beam Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 118 .

This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
266 for information on operating the
cruise control.

０６／０８／０２

１０：０９：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７６

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel Indicator

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.8 US gal (7.0 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E. You
will also see a "LOW FUEL" message
on the multi-information display (see
page 82).

Security System Indicator

Instruments and Controls

Active Damper System
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II), and remains on until the
engine starts. If this indicator comes
on at any other time, there is a
problem in the system. While this
indicator is on, the comfort button
will not work, and the system will
not function. You will also see a
"CHECK ADS SYSTEM" message on
the multi-information display. Have
the vehicle checked by your dealer as
soon as possible. For more
information, see page 353.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
265 for more information on the
security system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７７

Table of Contents

Gauges

TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE

Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you
have. It may show slightly more
or less than the actual amount.

Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.

U.S. model is shown.

Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For

instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page 428 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７８

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

When you open the driver’s door, a
‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on the
multi-information display. When you
turn the ignition switch from the ON
(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)
position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message is
shown on the display.

With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the multi-information
display changes as shown in the next
page each time you press the INFO
(▲/▼) button or SEL/RESET
button.

INFO (▲/▼)
BUTTON

SEL/
RESET
BUTTON

To change the display, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the main
menu appears (see page 74 ).

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
In the multi-information display, the
system message is also displayed
(see page 80 ) and you can
customize your vehicle control
settings (see page 83 ).

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００７９

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Main Menu
Go to Customize Menu (See page 83)

INFO button
SEL/RESET button

Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 276)

(See page 75)

Trip Computer (See page 78)

(See page 75)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 77)

０６／０８／０２

１２：４２：０９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８０

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Odometer

Trip Meter
TRIP METER

The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
CONTINUED
‘‘0.0.’’

Instruments and Controls

ODOMETER

When the main menu is blank,
SH-AWD or TIRE PRESSURE,
pressing the SEL/RESET button
changes the display to ‘‘trip meter/
odometer’’ ‘‘outside temperature/
odometer’’ and ‘‘engine oil life/
odometer’’.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８１

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 92 ).

Outside Temperature
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
U.S.

CANADA

This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Centigrade temperature in Canadian
models.

The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 91 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８２

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Engine Oil Life

SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitor

ENGINE OIL LIFE

Canada

This shows the remaining life of the
engine oil. It shows 100% after the
engine oil is replaced and the display
is reset. The engine oil life is
calculated based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions. For more information,
see page 375 .

This monitor shows how much
torque is being delivered to each
wheel. For more information, see
page 340 .

When the tire pressure monitor is
shown on the multi-information
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown.
You can see the pressure of each tire
in this monitor. If one or more tires
are low, inflate them to the correct
pressure. For more information, see
page 343 .

Instruments and Controls

U.S.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：４５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８３

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
HandsFreeLinkTM

You can receive or make phone calls
from your cellphone through your
vehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system without touching your
cellphone.

To use the system, your cellphone
and the HFL system must be linked.
Not all cellphones are compatible
with this system. Refer to page
276 for instructions on how to link
your cellphone to the HFL and how
to receive or make phone calls, or
visit the handsfreelink.com website.

Trip Computer

When the main menu displays Trip
Computer, pressing the SEL/RESET
button changes the display to
‘‘AVERAGE FUEL A/RANGE’’ to
‘‘AVERAGE FUEL B/RANGE’’ and
to ‘‘AVERAGE SPEED/ELAPSED
TIME’’.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１０：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８４

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
RANGE

ELAPSED TIME

This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.

This shows the time passed traveled
since you last reset it. When you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, ELAPSED TIME is reset.

You can customize the Trip A and
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition
in the multi-information display (see
page 92 ).

AVERAGE SPEED

If you want to reset the ELAPSED
TIME manually, go to the trip
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
and press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.

This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset condition in the multiinformation display (see page 94 ).

To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you
have traveled, press and hold the
SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.

Instruments and Controls

AVERAGE FUEL A/B

This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or liter/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset the Trip A or
Trip B.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８５

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message indicator comes on
for the first time.

If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.

Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.

To cancel the message(s) before 5
seconds elapsed, press the INFO
(▲/▼) button on the steering wheel.
Even if you press the INFO (▲/▼)
button, some messages stay on or
come on again at regular intervals
until the problem is corrected.
You can see the message(s) again by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly if the system message
indicator remains lit on the
instrument panel.
Here is a list of all messages:

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：１７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８６

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

See page
11

U.S.

Canada

See page
430

See page
20
See page
20

See page
431
U.S.

Canada

See page
430
See page
432

See page
33
U.S.

U.S.

Canada

See page
349

See page
33

Canada

See page
351
See page
432
See page
368
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

See page
151

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８７

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

See page
345

See page
341

See page
346

See page
341

See page
332

See page
121
See page
346

See page
333

See page
68

See page
354

See page
376

See page
392

See page
318

U.S.

Canada

See page
134
See page
71

０６／１１／０８

０９：５８：２４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８８

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Customize Settings

If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, or move the shift lever out
of Park, the display will change to
the normal screen.

When the main menu displays
‘‘Keyless Memory SettingsTM,’’ you
can customize some vehicle control
settings.
To enter the customizing mode,
press the SEL/RESET button.
To change the settings, the ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position, and the vehicle must be
stopped with the transmission in
Park.

To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote transmitter
is linked to the system (see Keyless
Memory Settings TM on page 139 ).

If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 86 .
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
CONTINUED
customize.

Instruments and Controls

You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００８９

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.89)

POSITION SETUP
(P.97)

Menu Item
LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY

Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.

TRIP A & AVG. FUEL
RESET with REFUEL
ADJUST
ALARM VOLUME

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three
levels.

ELAPSED TIME RESET

Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.

AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION

Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.

MEMORY POSITION LINK

Changes the driver’s seat, the steering wheel, and
the outside mirror positions to a stored setting.
Moves the steering wheel fully in and up when
the key is removed.

AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE
STEERING WHEEL
＊ : Default setting

Description
Changes the language used in the display.

Setting Option
ENGLISH＊
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F ∼ ±0°F＊ ∼ 5°F
(U.S.)
−3°C ∼ ±0°C＊ ∼ 3°C
(Canada)
ON
OFF＊
HIGH
MID＊
LOW
MANUAL ONLY
IGN OFF＊
TRIP B
TRIP A
MAX
LOW
HIGH
MIN
MID＊
OFF
ON＊
OFF
ON＊
OFF

Page
90

95
98
99

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：５２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９０

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
LIGHTING SETUP
(P.100)

Menu Item

Setting Option

Page

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.

101

AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY

Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
Changes the setting of when to automatically lock
the doors.

15 sec
60 sec
30 sec＊
60 sec
0 sec
30 sec
15 sec＊
LOW
MAX
MIN
HIGH
MID＊
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPD＊
OFF
SHIFT TO P＊
DRIVER DOOR/
IGN OFF
ALL DOORS
OFF
DRIVER DOOR＊
ALL DOORS
ON＊
OFF

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
WIPER SETUP
(P.113)
DEFAULT ALL
(P.86)
＊ : Default setting

WIPER ACTION

Changes the setting of when to automatically
unlock the driver’s/all the doors.
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter in a first push.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Changes the wiper operation between two settings
when the wiper switch is in the INT position.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

90 sec
60 sec
30 sec＊
INTERMITTENT
WITH VEH SPD＊
SET
CANCEL

102

103

106

107
109

110

111
113
86

Instruments and Controls

DOOR/WINDOW
SETUP
(P.105)

Description

INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT
AUTO OFF TIMER

０６／０８／０２

１０：１１：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９１

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL

If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.

To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９２

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
WIPER SETUP
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select CHG
SETTING, then press the SEL/
RESET button.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９３

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

METER SETUP
see page 89

POSITION SETUP
see page 97
Select ‘‘EXIT’’
LIGHTING SETUP
see page 100

Select ‘‘CANCEL’’

Select
‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP
see page 105

WIPER SETUP
see page 113
SEL/RESET BUTTON
INFO (▲/▼) BUTTON

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９４

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
Here are the six custom settings for
the meter setup:

Instruments and Controls

LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A & AVG. FUEL RESET
with REFUEL
ADJUST ALARM VOLUME
ELAPSED TIME RESET
AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION
While METER SETUP is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲/▼)
BUTTON

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９５

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Language Selection

There are three language selections
you can make: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired language by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９６

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

U.S. models

Canadian models

Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:

U.S. models

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９７

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset With Refuel

To cause Trip A and AVG. FUEL to
reset every time you refuel your
vehicle, follow these instructions:
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A & AVG. FUEL RESET with
REFUEL’’ and repeat the procedure
again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１２：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９８

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Adjust Alarm Volume

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

Select the desired level by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ADJUST ALARM VOLUME’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

Select the warning alarm volume
from three levels.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

００９９

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Elapsed Time Reset

There are four elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
MANUAL ONLY − You can reset
the elapsed time, when Trip
Computer’s Elapsed Time is
displayed (see page 79 ).
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when the Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset
when the Trip B is reset.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１００

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Auto Interior Illumination

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW
and MIN levels and OFF for the auto
interior illumination settings.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

If you want the illuminations to start
dimming as early as possible, select
MAX. For illuminations to start
dimming as late as possible, select
MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW
for levels in between.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘METER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

To disable the auto interior
illumination function, select OFF.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

While the headlight switch is turned
on, the interior lights gradually dim,
as the outside light level gets low.
You can customize at which outside
light level the lights start to dim.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０１

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
INTERIOR ILLUMINATION’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０２

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
Here are the two custom settings for
the position setup:

Instruments and Controls

MEMORY POSITION LINK
AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE
STEERING WHEEL
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲ or ▼)
BUTTON

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０３

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
set to ‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat, the
steering wheel, and outside mirror
positions move to the position stored
in the memory when you open the
driver’s door, using the remote
transmitter.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０４

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Auto Tilt & Telescope Steering Wheel

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
TILT & TELESCOPE STEERING
WHEEL’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls

When ‘‘AUTO TILT & TELESCOPE
STEERING WHEEL’’ is set to ‘‘ON,’’
the steering wheel automatically
moves fully in and up when you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position and remove the key.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０５

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

100

SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲ or ▼)
BUTTON

０６／０８／０２

１０：１３：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０６

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
CONTINUED

101

Instruments and Controls

The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and tailgate. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０７

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer

The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

102

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０８

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.

HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.

CONTINUED

103

Instruments and Controls

The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１０９

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

104

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１０

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Door/Window Setup
Here are the five custom settings for
the door/window setup:

Instruments and Controls

AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’
is shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲ or ▼)
BUTTON

CONTINUED

105

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１１

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Lock

There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
WITH VEH SPD −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
OFF −
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.

106

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１２

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock

There are three settings you can
choose from:

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR LOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.

IGN OFF − The driver’s door or all
the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting ( see page 106 ),
unlock when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
OFF − The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time. This is the
factory default setting.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

CONTINUED

107

Instruments and Controls

SHIFT TO P − The driver’s door or
all the doors, depending on the door
lock mode setting ( see page 106 ),
unlock when you move the shift
lever to Park.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１４：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１３

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.

If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGN
OFF’’, you will see the above display.

Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

Press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
switch the door lock mode setting
between the driver’s door and all
doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter your selection.

108

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１４

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Key and Remote Unlock Mode

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
CONTINUED

109

Instruments and Controls

To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors unlock when
you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, follow these
instructions.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：０９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１５

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 265 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

110

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１６

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer

You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
CONTINUED

111

Instruments and Controls

If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１７

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

112

When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１８

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display
Wiper Setup

Wiper Action

You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:

Here is one custom setting for the
wiper setup:
WIPER ACTION
While ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.

WITH VEH SPD − The intermittent
operation varies according to vehicle
speed.

Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

113

Instruments and Controls

SEL/RESET
BUTTON
INFO (▲/▼)
BUTTON

INTERMITTENT − The
intermittent operation varies
according to the selection you make
on the wiper lever’s intermittent
control ring.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１１９

Table of Contents

Multi-Information Display

You can choose this customize item
from ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ by pressing
the INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.

114

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２０

Table of Contents

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

HEADLIGHT WASHER
SWITCH＊
(P.117)

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(P.118)

STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.229)

WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.116)

HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.122)

MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.153)

REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.122)

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
(P.155)

ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.164)

POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.130)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.147)

SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
(P.146)

HORN＊1

FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE BUTTON
(P.317)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE (P.319)

STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS (P.124)

CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.266)

ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH＊
(P.353)

＊: If equipped
＊1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

115

Instruments and Controls

PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.34)

VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH
(P.352)

POWER TAILGATE
BUTTON＊ (P.132)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.123)

０６／０８／０２

１０：１５：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２１

Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.

LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.

MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle speed.
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers

116

If you turn it to the shortest delay,
the wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’
setting, see page 113 .

Windshield Washer − Pull back
and hold the wiper control lever.
The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run
at low speed, then complete one
more sweep after you release the
lever.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２２

Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers
Headlight Washers
(On Canadian models)

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

1. When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
2. ON − Rotate the switch
clockwise to turn the rear window
wiper ON. The wiper operates
intermittently.

CONTINUED

117

Instruments and Controls

The headlight washers can be
operated at any time by pressing the
headlight washer button located next
to the steering wheel column. The
headlights must be turned on to use
this button. In addition, the headlight
washer operates when the
windshield washers are first turned
on.

The headlight washers use the same
fluid reservoir as the windshield
washers.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２３

Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
3. Hold past ON to turn the rear
window wiper on and to spray the
rear window washer.

Turn Signal and Headlights

4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
When you shift the transmission
to the reverse position with the
front windshield wipers activated,
the rear window wiper operates
automatically.
When the wiper control lever
position is INT, the rear wiper
operates intermittently. When it is
LO or HI, the rear wiper operates
continuously.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.

118

Turn Signal − Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate lights.

1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. AUTO
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off
9. Fog lights on

Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：１９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２４

Table of Contents

Headlights
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.

High Beams − To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The blue high beam indicator will
come on (see page 70 ). Pull it back
to return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams stay on as long as you hold
the lever back.

To turn on automatic lighting, turn
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically
when the outside light level becomes
low (at dusk, for example). The
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. The lights and indicator
will turn off automatically when the
system senses high ambient light.
The lights will remain on when you
turn off the ignition switch. They will
turn off automatically when you
remove the key and open the driver’s
door. To turn them on again, either
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position or turn the light switch
to
.

Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page
103 .
Do not leave the light switch in
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or off for a long time.

119

Instruments and Controls

This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.

AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights and
all other exterior lights, when it
senses low ambient light.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２５

Table of Contents

Headlights
LIGHT SENSOR

Fog Lights
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off.

The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.

120

Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off, the
daytime running lights come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parking brake. They remain on until
you turn the ignition switch off, even
if you set the parking brake.
When the headlights are on, the
daytime running lights are off.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２６

Table of Contents

Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.

When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 102 .
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position, and you remove the key,
then open and close the driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door and get out, the lights turn
off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if
the switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position).
The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.

121

Instruments and Controls

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２７

Table of Contents

Hazard Warning, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button

Rear Window Defogger

Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on. Pushing this
button also turns the mirror heaters
on or off (see page 154 ).

Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.

122

The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：４８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２８

Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel by pressing the ＋
or − button. Press the ＋ button to
increase the brightness and the −
button to decrease it. You can adjust
the brightness with the headlight
switch on or off.

The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display while
you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds
after you finish adjusting.

You can customize when the glare
reduction function starts. To change
‘‘AUTO INTERIOR
ILLUMINATION’’, see page 95 for
more information.

123

Instruments and Controls

To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. To cancel the glare
reduction function, set the
brightness to the highest level, then
press the ＋ button. You will hear a
beep when it is canceled.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１６：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１２９

Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Move the steering wheel in, out, up,
or down by pushing and holding the
adjustment switch in that direction.

124

Release the switch when the
steering wheel reaches the desired
position. Make sure the steering
wheel points towards your chest, not
toward your face, and that you can
see the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：００

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３０

Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Adjustments
When you remove the key from the
ignition switch, the steering wheel
automatically moves fully in and up.

The steering wheel then returns to
its original position when you insert
the key back in the ignition switch.
Steering wheel movement is also
controlled by the driving position
memory system (see page 155 ).

Instruments and Controls

To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &
TELESCOPE STEERING WHEEL’’
setting, see page 99 .

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
fuse for the power tilt and telescopic
steering wheel is removed, the
power tilt and telescopic steering
wheel system needs to be reset
when you reconnect the battery or
install the fuse.
Insert the key into the ignition
switch, and remove it. The steering
wheel automatically moves fully in
and up to let you know the system is
reset.

125

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３１

Table of Contents

Keys and Locks
KEY
MASTER KEY VALET KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Light Gray)
TAG
TRANSMITTER

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models shown.

These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.

MDX, Technology, and Sport
Packages models shown.

The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.

126

You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Acura-approved key blanks.

Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３２

Table of Contents

Keys and Locks
Retractable Master Key
RELEASE BUTTON
Push

The key may come in contact with
your finger while being retracted or
extended. Make sure your fingers do
not touch the pivot of the key when
retracting or extending the key.
Instruments and Controls

Always use the fully-extended key
when you insert it to the ignition
switch. If the key does not fully
extend, the immobilizer system may
not operate properly and prevents
from starting the engine.

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models shown.

The master key can be retracted into
the remote transmitter. To use the
key, push the release button to
release the key from the transmitter.
The key should be fully extended.
To retract the key, push the release
button and at the same time push the
key into the remote transmitter until
it is securely latched.

127

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３３

Table of Contents

Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.

The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.

When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.

If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.

This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

128

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３４

Table of Contents

Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.

The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.

The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.

ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.

129

Instruments and Controls

ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.

You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３５

Table of Contents

Door Locks
UNLOCK

LOCK

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
109 .
When the vehicle speed reaches
about 10 mph (about 15 km/h) or
more, all the doors lock
automatically.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 106 .

LOCK

To lock all doors and the tailgate,
press the bottom of the master door
lock switch on either front door, pull
the lock tab above the driver’s door
handle, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
Pressing the top of either master
door lock switch will unlock all doors
and the tailgate.

130

UNLOCK

The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.

When you shift to P after driving, the
driver’s door unlocks.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 107 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：１７：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３６

Table of Contents

Door Locks, Tailgate
Lockout Prevention

Tailgate

The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.

To open the tailgate, push up inside
the handle, then lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the inner handle to pull
it down, then press down on the back
edge.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
CONTINUED
58 .

131

Instruments and Controls

Childproof Door Locks

With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver’s door pops
out.

０６／０８／０２

１２：４２：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３７

Table of Contents

Tailgate
Power Tailgate

POWER TAILGATE SWITCH

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

The tailgate can be opened and
closed with the remote transmitter
(see page 135 ) or the switch in the
driver’s door pocket when both front
doors are unlocked.

132

Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter or the switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate. Each time you press the
button on the remote transmitter or
the switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
If you push the same button or
switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.

TAILGATE SWITCH

The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
you press the button again while the
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３８

Table of Contents

Tailgate
Auto-Reverse

Closing a power tailgate while
anyone is in the path of the
tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear
before closing the power
tailgate.

Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the tailgate or
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
feature stops working when the
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
can pull the tailgate shut.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
or installing the fuse, close the
tailgate fully by hand.
The power tailgate may not open or
close under the these conditions:
The vehicle is parked on a steep
hill.

When the tailgate or the roof is
covered with snow or ice.
Do not install any accessories on the
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
to function properly. If there is snow
or ice on the tailgate, make sure to
remove it before you operate the
tailgate.
If you push the tailgate release
button inside the handle while the
tailgate is opening or closing, it will
stop moving. You need to open or
close it the rest of the way manually.
The tailgate has sensors on both
sides. Be careful not to damage them.
If the sensors are damaged, the
power tailgate does not function
properly.

When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.

133

Instruments and Controls

The power tailgate has an autoreverse feature. If it meets
resistance while opening or closing,
it will beep three times and reverse
direction. However, the tailgate may
not reverse immediately. Always
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１３９

Table of Contents

Tailgate
If you try to drive off with the
tailgate not closed completely, a
beeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message is
shown on the multi-information
display.

Unlocking the Tailgate

Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58 .
If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’
message on the multi-information
display. Have the system checked by
your dealer.
With this message shown on the
multi-information display, you can
still open or close the tailgate
manually.

134

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate.

Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４０

Table of Contents

Tailgate, Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter
U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

MDX, Technology, and Sport
Packages models
LOCK
BUTTON

UNLOCK
BUTTON

LOCK
BUTTON

TAILGATE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON

MDX, Technology, and Sport Packages
models

If you cannot open the tailgate,
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate (see page 134 ). Push the
release lever to the right as shown,
then pull the outer handle to open
the tailgate.

LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash. When you
push LOCK twice within 5 seconds,
you will hear a beep to verify that the
doors and tailgate are locked and the
security system has set. This button
does not work if any door or tailgate
is not fully closed.

PANIC
BUTTON

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,
see page 110 .

CONTINUED

135

Instruments and Controls

UNLOCK
BUTTON

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：２５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４１

Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
when you push the button. If you do
not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock.
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page
109 .
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page
111 .

136

When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page 158 ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
the doors and the tailgate with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

TAILGATE − Press and hold the
TAILGATE button to open or close
the power tailgate. When the tailgate
begins to move, you will hear a beep,
and some front and rear lights will
flash.
If you push the same button again
while the tailgate is opening or
closing, three beeps sound, the
tailgate stops moving, reverses
direction and stops in the fully
opened or fully closed position.

PANIC − Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：３５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４２

Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.

Instruments and Controls

Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

Battery type: CR1616

SCREW

KEYPAD

To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Separate the keypad from the
transmitter by pushing any button
from outside.

CONTINUED

137

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４３

Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same (− side facing up), then
insert it in the keypad.
BATTERY

An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.

3. Place a cloth on the edge of the
keypad, and remove the upper half
by carefully prying on the edge
with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

138

5. Snap the two halves of the keypad,
then install the parts in reverse
order.

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１８：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４４

Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter
Keyless Memory SettingsTM

Here are the settings activated with
the remote;
Customized settings
(see page 83 ).

Audio system settings
(see page 198 ).
Climate control settings
(see page 169 ).
When you unlock the driver’s door
with your remote, each remote
activates the keyless memory
settings related to that remote. The
driver’s ID (MEMORY 1 or
MEMORY 2) is shown on the back
of each remote.

When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
the power lumbar feature) and
outside mirrors start to move to the
positions stored in memory. The
indicator in the related memory
button to the remote comes on.
The steering wheel will move to the
stored position when you insert the
key into the ignition switch.

To turn off this feature, press and
hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons at the same time. The LED
in the remote will blink twice. Then
release the buttons. Doing this
cancels the keyless memory settings
for that remote and restores the
default settings.
To turn the keyless memory settings
back on, repeat this procedure. The
LED will blink once to indicate the
feature has been turned on.

139

Instruments and Controls

Driving position memory
(see page 155 ).

You will also see the ‘‘WELCOME
DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘WELCOME
DRIVER 2’’ message on the multiinformation display, depending on
which linked remote transmitter is
used.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１９：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４５

Table of Contents

Seats

See pages 12 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.

The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.

Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.

Front Seat Power Adjustments

The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any lumbar adjustment.

Moves the seat forward
and backward.

Moves the front of the
seat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

140

Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)

０６／０８／０２

１０：１９：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４６

Table of Contents

Seats
Head Restraints
See page 14 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.

To remove one for cleaning or repair,
push the release button, and lift the
restraint up.

FRONT

They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.

RELEASE BUTTON

The front and the second row outer
head restraints adjust for height.
The head restraints in the second
row center and third row seating
positions can be positioned in the
fully lowered or fully raised position.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED

141

Instruments and Controls

Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.

Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.

０６／１１／０８

１０：００：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４７

Table of Contents

Seats
SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW

Adjusting the Second Seat

Folding the Second Seat
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
1. To unlatch the detachable anchor
before folding the seat-back, insert
the latch plate into the slot on the
side of the anchor buckle and
allow the seat belt to retract. Store
the detachable anchor and seat
belt latch plates in the retractor
housing.

RELEASE BUTTON
HANDLE

When a passenger is seated in the
second row center or a third row
seating position, make sure the
center head restraint is properly
positioned.

To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on
the handle on the outside of the seatback, and push the seat-back.
Overall, the seat-back has six
different positions.

2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
3. Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.

142

０６／０８／０２

１０：１９：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４８

Table of Contents

Seats
Third Row Access

Folding the Third Row Seat
1. Use the latch plate to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor.

NOTE: To fold the third row seat,
the second row seat-back must be
folded down or completely up right.
THIRD SEAT

HANDLE

RELEASE LEVER

To get into the third row seats, pull
up the lever on the side of the
passenger’s side second row seatback. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and then can be slid forward.

3. Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure the outer shoulder belts
are positioned on each hook
whenever the third seat is folded.

After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
CONTINUED

143

Instruments and Controls

2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１９：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１４９

Table of Contents

Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving. Reconnect the seat
belts to the detachable anchors.

Detachable Anchor

Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 324 ).

Using a seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
LATCH PLATE

The seat belts in the second row
center seat and the third row seats
are equipped with detachable
anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.

144

When the seats are returned to the
upright position, these detachable
anchors should be latched back
properly.

Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.

０６／０８／０２

１０：１９：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５０

Table of Contents

Seats
SECOND ROW CENTER SEAT

THIRD ROW SEATS

SMALL LATCH PLATE

LATCH PLATE

HOOK
SMALL LATCH PLATE

Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.

ANCHOR BUCKLE

Pull out the outer shoulder belts
from the hook. Both of the third-row
hooks should only be used when the
seat belt is detached.

Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.

145

Instruments and Controls

TRIANGLE
MARKS

０６／０８／０２

１２：４２：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５１

Table of Contents

Seat Heaters

Passenger’s
Seat
HI

HEATERS

Driver’s
Seat

Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat is
only heated in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag off system.

146

Front seat

LOW

The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use them. Push
the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.

Second row seat

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

The outer second row seat cushions
and seat-backs are equipped with
seat heaters. Turning the switch on
the driver side warms the outer seat
behind the driver’s seat only. The
passenger side switch warms the
outer seat behind the front
passenger seat.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５２

Table of Contents

Seat Heaters, Power Windows
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.

DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.

Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.

Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
AUTO − To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
CONTINUED

147

Instruments and Controls

In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.

The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：０９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５３

Table of Contents

Power Windows
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.

AUTO REVERSE − If either front
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.

When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
1. Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.

148

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５４

Table of Contents

Power Windows, Moonroof
Opening/Closing the Windows
and Moonroof with the Key

4. When the windows or moonroof
stops before opening fully, to open
the windows and moonroof further,
turn and hold the key again
(within 5 seconds).

1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. All the
doors unlock, and all four windows
and moonroof start to open. To
stop the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again and hold it. If the
windows and the moonroof stop
before the desired position, repeat
steps 1 and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.

3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.

To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
You can open and close the windows
and moonroof with the key in the
driver’s door lock.
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.

2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
CONTINUED

149

Instruments and Controls

Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof from outside with the
remote transmitter.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５５

Table of Contents

Power Windows, Moonroof
4. To close the windows and
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 5 seconds).

Moonroof

Auto reverse does not work when
closing the windows and
moonroof with the key.

To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
the moonroof switch lightly and hold
it. The moonroof will stop when you
release the switch.

NOTE: If the windows and moonroof
stop before the desired position,
repeat steps 2 and 3.
MOONROOF SWITCH

To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.

150

To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５６

Table of Contents

Moonroof, Parking Brake

Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.

You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.

If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.

Parking Brake
RELEASE HANDLE

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
fully. The parking brake indicator on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released, and the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position (see page129 ).
You will also see a "RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE" message on the
multi-information display (see
page 82).
CONTINUED

151

Instruments and Controls

Auto Reverse
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
Auto reverse does not work when
closing the windows and
moonroof with the key.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５７

Table of Contents

Parking Brake, Mirrors

Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.

Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.

U.S. models

TAB

On U.S. models

The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

152

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５８

Table of Contents

Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Canadian models

SELECTOR
SWITCH

SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON

On Canadian models

The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).

CONTINUED

153

Instruments and Controls

There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect
perf ormance.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２０：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１５９

Table of Contents

Mirrors
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.

Depending on the position of the
selector switch, the left or right side
mirror will pivot downward slightly
when you shift the transmission into
reverse. In the left position, the left
mirror pivots. In the right position,
the right mirror pivots. This gives
you a better view of that side of the
vehicle while parallel parking. The
mirror returns to its original position
when you take the transmission out
of reverse. To turn this feature off,
leave the switch in the center
position.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 155 ).

154

Heated Mirrors
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６０

Table of Contents

Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the steering wheel, driver’s seat,
and outside mirror positions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new driving position to the
memory unless the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 140 ).
Adjust the steering wheel to a
comfortable position (see page
124).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 153 ).

MEMORY BUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

3. Press and release the MEMO
button on the control panel. You
will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator in the
memory button will come on. The
current positions of the driver’s
seat, steering wheel, and outside
mirrors are now stored.
CONTINUED

155

Instruments and Controls

Seat, except for power lumbar,
steering wheel and outside mirror
positions can be stored in separate
memories. You select a memorized
position by pushing the appropriate
button or using the appropriate
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or
Driver 2). For more information see
page 139 .

Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driving position only when
the vehicle is parked.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６１

Table of Contents

Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after
pressing the MEMO button will
cancel the storing procedure.
Not pressing a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Readjusting the seat position.
Readjust the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.

Selecting a Memorized Position
To select a memorized position, do
this:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
The system will move the seat,
steering wheel, and outside mirrors
to the memorized positions. The
indicator in the selected memory
button will flash during movement.
When the adjustments are complete,
you will hear two beeps, and the
indicator will remain on.
To change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting, see page
98 .

156

To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the control
panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat, steering wheel
or outside mirrors after they are in
their memorized position. If you
change the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６２

Table of Contents

Interior Lights
Light Control Switch
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

When the switch is in the door activated
position:

After all doors are closed tightly, the
lights dim slightly, then fade out in
about 30 seconds.
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
101 .

OFF

The light control switch has three
positions: OFF, Door Activated, and
ON.
When the switch is in the OFF position:

The individual door lights or the
tailgate lights will operate when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

The individual map lights in the
front and second rows come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors (see page 136 ). When the
doors and the tailgate are closed,
each light can be turned on and off
by pushing the lens.
The cargo area light comes on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened if the light control switch
is in the door activated (center)
position. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, the cargo area
light can be turned on with the
switch in the light.

With any door or the tailgate left
open, the lights stay on about 3
minutes, then go out.
The lights also come on when the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.

CONTINUED

157

Instruments and Controls

The individual map lights in the
second row and the cargo area
light in the third row cannot be
turned on.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：３６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６３

Table of Contents

Interior Lights
When the light control switch is in the

Individual Map Lights

ON position:
FRONT

All the individual map lights come
on and stay on as long as the
switch remains in the ON position.
The cargo (3rd row) area light
comes on if the switch is in the
door activated position.
COURTESY LIGHT

Turn on the front row individual map
lights by pushing the lens. Push the
lens again to turn it off. With the
light control switch in the door
activated position, the second row
map lights can be turned on by
pushing the lens. Push the lens again
to turn it off.

158

The courtesy light between the map
lights comes on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, press either of the
instrument panel brightness control
buttons (＋ or −).

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６４

Table of Contents

Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light

OFF

Individual Interior Lights
The courtesy lights in all four doors
come on when you open any door.
The light around the ignition switch
comes on when any door is opened.
After you close the door, the ignition
switch light stays on for about 30
seconds regardless of the interior
light dimming time setting (see page
101 ).

The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.

159

Instruments and Controls

Tailgate Lights
The lights in the tailgate have an onoff switch to control if the lights
come on when the tailgate is opened.
The tailgate lights do not come on
when any other doors are opened.

０６／０８／０２

１２：４２：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６５

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

SUNGLASSES HOLDER
SUN VISOR

COAT HOOK

VANITY MIRROR

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
GROCERY HOOK

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

ACCESORY
POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER

160

BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESORY POWER SOCKET

０６／０８／０２

１０：２１：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６６

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.

Open the front beverage holder by
sliding the lid.

ARMREST

The center seat-back in the second is
equipped with an armrest that
provides the beverage holder. Pivot
down the seat-back to use them.

BEVERAGE HOLDER

To open the beverage holder, press
and release the front lid. To close,
press the lid again until it latches.
When you put back the armrest in
the center seat-back, make sure the
lid is closed properly.

161

Instruments and Controls

Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.

FRONT LID

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６７

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment

Storage Compartment

Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.

LIDS

BUTTONS

LID

Your vehicle is equipped with a front
seat armrest pad that is also a
console compartment. To open the
console compartment fully, push
both buttons at the front of the
compartment.

162

The storage compartment with a
sliding lid is at the left-side foot of
the front passenger seat.
For the third row, a storage
compartment is located in the
passenger side armrest. To open the
compartment, push the button and
lift the lid.

An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６８

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses Holder

Cargo Hooks

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the raised detent. It will unlatch
and swing down. To close it, push it
until it latches. Make sure the holder
is closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.

The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.

163

Instruments and Controls

HOOK
PUSH

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１６９

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visor

Vanity Mirror

Slide

SUN VISOR

To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Do not use the extended sun visor
over the inside mirror.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

164

To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror light will not come
on if the sun visor is slid outward.

Accessory Power Sockets
Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets, depending
on the model. All models have the
front accessory power socket under
the audio system and rear socket
behind the third row seat on the
driver’s side.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７０

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

AC Power Outlet

MDX, Technology, and Sport Packages
models

The accessory power socket is
located at the back of the front
console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Instruments and Controls

None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.

U.S. Entertainment Packages and
Canadian Elite Package models

There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
inside the front console
compartment. To use the AC power
outlet, open the lids and open the
outlet cover. Insert the plug into the
receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
CONTINUED

165

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７１

Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.

166

NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：３５

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７２

Main Menu

Features
The climate control system in your
vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.

HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 272
HandsFreeLinkTM ........................... 276
AcuraLink ....................................... 303
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 314

Features

The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.

Climate Control System ................ 168
Rear Climate Controls................... 173
Audio System ................................. 178
Playing the AM/FM Radio
(Models without navigation
system) ................................... 179
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 183
Playing Discs .................................. 188
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 197
Audio System (Models with
navigation system) .................... 198
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 199
Radio Reception ............................. 203
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 208
Playing Discs .................................. 216
Disc Changer Error Messages .... 226
Protecting Your Discs ................... 227
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 228
Remote Audio Controls................. 229
Radio Theft Protection.................. 231
Setting the Clock and Calendar ... 232
Rear Entertainment System ......... 233
Security System ............................. 265
Cruise Control ................................ 266
Compass.......................................... 269

167

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７３

Table of Contents

Climate Control System

FRONT CONTROL PANEL

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
AUTO INDICATOR

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDE TEMPERATURE
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS

FRONT PASSENGER’S
SIDE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON
REAR BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

REAR CONTROL PANEL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE

AUTO SYNC INDICATOR

REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

AUTO BUTTON

MODE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON

168

MODE BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON

０６／０８／０２

１０：２２：５２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７４

Table of Contents

Climate Control System

Voice Control System
On vehicles with navigation system

The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
1. Press the Auto button on the front
control panel.
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control buttons.
You will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
3. You can set the driver’s side
temperature, the passenger’s side
temperature, and the temperature
of the rear passenger
compartment separately.

The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference.
Temperature Control

The driver’s side temperature, the
passenger’s side temperature and
the rear passenger compartment
temperature can be set separately.
Press the ▲ button of the
appropriate temperature control to
increase the temperature of airflow.
Press the ▼ button to decrease it.
Each set temperature is shown in the
display. The rear temperature is
shown in the display on the back of
the center console.

CONTINUED

169

Features

Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote, the driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the
climate control settings are turned to
the respective mode automatically
when the ignition is turned to the
ON (II) position.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７５

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
When the indicator in the dual
button is on, the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
175 ).
When the indicator in the rear
button is on, the temperature of the
rear passenger compartment can be
controlled independently (see page
175 ).
On vehicles with navigation system

In the Auto mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver, front passenger, and rear

170

passengers according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the sun
light sensor and the sun position
which is updated automatically by
the navigation’s global positioning
system (GPS). For example, if the
driver’s side of the vehicle getting to
much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
Dual Button

You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator is on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
the temperatures for both sides are
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. When defrost mode is
selected, dual mode operation is
canceled.

Rear Button

When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment can be
adjusted separately with the
temperature control buttons on the
back of the center console. With the
indicator off, the temperature of the
rear passenger compartment is
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. You will see the AUTO
SYNC on the system display of the
rear control panel. Changing the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment also makes the
indicator to turn on, and takes the
system out of synchronized mode.
This causes the word SYNC in the
display to go out.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７６

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
To Turn Everything Off
If you press the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.

Fan Control
▲ button to increase
Press the
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
▼ button to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.

Recirculation Button

When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.

171

Features

To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.

Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７７

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
Rear Window Defogger Button

This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page122 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Mode Control

Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.

Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
Windshield Defroster Button

This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.

Air flows from the floor
vents.

172

When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.

For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the front passenger’s and rear
passenger compartment
temperatures cannot be set
separately from the driver’s.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７８

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
REAR Climate Controls
REAR CONTROL PANEL

REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
FAN
CONTROL
BUTTONS

AUTO BUTTON
REAR BUTTON

Rear Button

When the indicator in this button is
off, the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment is
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. If the AUTO mode is
selected on the front control panel,
you will see the AUTO SYNC on the
rear system display. When the
indicator in this button is on, the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment can be adjusted with

the rear temperature control buttons.
A passenger can also adjust the fan
speed and airflow.

MODE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON

You can use the rear control panel
when the indicator in the REAR
button on the front control panel is
on. Pressing any control button on
the rear control panel turns on the
rear button indicator on the front
control panel.

CONTINUED

173

Features

REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
BUTTONS

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：４５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１７９

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
Temperature Control

Fan Control

Automatic Operation

Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.

Press the
▲ fan control button
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
▼ button to
Press the
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.

Pressing the AUTO button puts the
system in automatic operation mode.
The rear system automatically
adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment. You will see AUTO in
the display.

Mode Control

Each time you press the mode
button, the mode display changes
from
to
.
When
is selected, air flows
from the upper vents on the back of
the center console.
When
is selected, air flows
from the lower vents.

174

Pressing the OFF button shuts off
the rear climate control system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８０

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
Triple Zone Temperature Control
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side can be
controlled independently when the
indicator in the DUAL button is on.

Driver’s Side

Passenger’s Side

Features

When the indicator in the REAR
button is on, the temperature of the
rear passenger compartment can be
controlled independently.
To adjust each temperature, press
either of the temperature control
buttons (▲or▼) on the climate
control panel.

Rear Passenger Comparment

CONTINUED

175

０６／０８／０２

１０：２３：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８１

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
Push AUTO or
. The selected
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s temperature
control buttons.

When the indicator in the REAR
button is off, the temperature of the
rear passenger compartment is
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. You will see the AUTO
SYNC on the system display of the
rear control panel.

To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s side, press the DUAL
button, then press either of the
driver’s temperature control button
(▲or▼). To set the passenger’s side
to a different value than the driver’s
side, press either of the front
passenger’s temperature control
button (▲or▼). You can adjust the
passenger’s side without pressing
the DUAL button first.

To set the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment to a
different value then the driver’s side,
press the REAR button, then press
either temperature control buttons
on the back of the center console.
The word ‘‘SYNC’’ in the display
goes out. You can also adjust the
rear temperature without pressing
the REAR button first. Pressing
either button causes the indicator of
the REAR button to turn on.
When you set each temperature to
its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’.

176

０６／０８／０２

１０：２４：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８２

Table of Contents

Climate Control System
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

Features

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

To regulate the interior temperature
and humidity, the climate control
system has two sensors. A sunlight
sensor is located in the top of the
dashboard and a temperature/
humidity sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or, spill liquid or spray
chemical cleaners on the sensors.

177

０６／１１／０８

１０：００：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８３

Table of Contents

Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.

With navigation system

With rear entertainment system

For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 179 through 197 .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 198 through 226 .

Without navigation system

178

０６／１１／０８

１０：０１：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８４

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

SEEK BUTTONS

AUTO SELECT BUTTON
FM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

POWER/VOLUME KNOB
AM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

179

０６／０８／０２

１０：２４：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８５

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.

180

To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the ＋ or − SEEK button, then
release it.

SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２４：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８６

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.

To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.

The presets may be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
203 .

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.

181

Features

1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２４：４８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８７

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speedsensitive volume compensation)
settings.

SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.

choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.

Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.

BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
CENTER − Adjusts the strength of
sound from the center speaker.

182

The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)

Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page123 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０１：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８８

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

CATEGORY BUTTONS

XM RADIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON
TUNE KNOB

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

DISP/MODE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CONTINUED

183

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１８９

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, except Hawaii and
Alaska.
On Canadian models, you can also
receive XM Satellite Radio in
Canada.
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Operating the Satellite Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’
button. Adjust the volume by turning

184

the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.

TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
CATEGORY (− or ＋) − Press
either button to select another
category.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９０

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
2. Use the TUNE knob, or the
CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to
tune to a desired channel.

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

To store a channel:
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.

5. Press the XM button again. The
other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.

The presets may be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.

Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
CONTINUED

185

Features

SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９１

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

186

Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９２

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models without navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.

Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
the display, and you’ll be able to
listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.

187

Features

Driving on the south side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９３

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

TRACK/FILE NUMBER

MP3/WMA INDICATOR
FOLDER
NUMBER

DISC SLOT

SEEK BUTTONS

DISC LOAD BUTTON

DISC EJECT BUTTON

POWER/VOLUM KNOB

TUNE (FOLDER) KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS

RANDOM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON

188

REPEAT BUTTON

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９４

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency:
22.051/32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers

Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
CONTINUED

189

Features

You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
DISC button. You will see ‘‘DISC’’ in
the display. The disc and track
numbers, and the elapsed time are
shown in the display. You can also
select the displayed information with
the DISP button (see page 191 ). The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.

This audio system can also play CDRs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ in
the display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear in the display. The disc,
folder and track numbers are
displayed. You can select up to 255
folders or tracks.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２５：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９５

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays CD FORMAT, and then
skips to the next file.

Loading Discs

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holds up to six discs.
1. Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in
the display. To load only one disc,
press and release the LOAD
button.
2. The disc number for an empty
position begins blinking.
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.

190

You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this unit.
4. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９６

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function

Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.

If you press and hold the DISP
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.

With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.

If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text data
under these conditions:

The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).

When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.

When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.

CONTINUED

191

Features

You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.

If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the ＞ indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to about
31 characters of the text data.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９７

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files

track.

Use the seek buttons while a disc is
playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA
mode).

To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold the ＋ or − seek
button.

In MP3 or WMA mode, use the
TUNE knob to select folders in the
disc and use either seek button to
change files.
To select a different disc, use the
appropriate preset buttons (1
through 6). If you select an empty
position, the system will go into the
loading sequence (see page 190 ).
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the ＋ seek button,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode). Press and
release the − seek button to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous

192

REPEAT (Track Repeat) − To
continuously replay a track (file in
MP3 or WMA mode), press and
release the RPT button. You will see
RPT in the display. Press and hold
the RPT button to turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right until it clicks
once to skip to the next folder, and to
the left to move to the beginning of
the current folder. Turn it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder. Turning the TUNE knob
more than two clicks skips several
folders.

Pressing either seek button also
turns off the repeat feature.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：２４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９８

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode

DISC REPEAT − This feature
continuously replays the current disc.
To active disc repeat, press and
release the RPT button repeatedly
until you see D-RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button again
to turn it off.

Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
repeat then to normal playing.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM button
for 2 seconds to return to normal
play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays the
files within a current folder in
random order, rather than in the
order they are compressed in MP3
or WMA. To activate folder random
play, press and release the RDM
button repeatedly. You will see FRDM in the display. The system will
then select and play files randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
folder random play by pressing and
holding the RDM button again, or
you select a different folder with the
TUNE knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play, to within a
disc random play, then to normal
play.

193

Features

FOLDER REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all the files
on the selected folder in the order
they are compressed in MP3 or
WMA. To activate folder repeat
mode, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see
F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press and hold the RPT
button to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button, or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob also
turns off the repeat feature.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０１９９

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the tracks on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc (all files in the selected folder in
MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.

194

In MP3 or WMA mode

F-SCAN − This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder on the disc in the order
they are recorded. To activate the
folder scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
file in the main folders for about 10
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then play the following
first files for 10 seconds each. When
it plays a file that you want to
continue listening to, press and hold
the SCAN button.

Pressing either seek button, or
selecting a different disc (using the
preset buttons) or folder (using the
TUNE knob) turns off the SCAN or
F-SCAN feature.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：３６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２００

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
When the first track in the last disc,
or the first file in the last main folder
in the last disc begins to play, the
disc scan mode will be canceled.
Pressing either seek button or
selecting a different folder with the
TUNE knob also turns off the scan
feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan, disc scan, then to normal
playing.
In MP3 or WMA mode

To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing, press the DISC button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the DISC button again to
switch back to the disc changer.

Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan, folder scan, disc scan,
then to normal playing.

CONTINUED

195

Features

D-SCAN − This feature, when
activated, samples the first track in
each disc in order (the first file in
the main folder on each disc in MP3
or WMA mode). To activate the disc
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly until DSCAN shows in the display. The
system will then play the first track/
file in the first main folder in the first
disc for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then play
the following first tracks/files for 10
seconds each. When it plays a track/
file that you want to continue
listening to, press and hold the
SCAN button again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０１

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.

To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.

Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer

You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.

To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject button. When a disc is
removed from a slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload into the slot. Then the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM, or XM).

196

Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
227 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０２

Table of Contents

Disc Changer Error Message (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Massage
HEAT ERROR
FORMAT

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.

BAD DISC −
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC −
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL

High temperature
Track/File format not
supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will skipped. The next supported
track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt.
Insert the disc again. If the code does not
disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed,
consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc
out of the player.

The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

197

Features

The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.

Cause

０６／０８／０２

１０：２６：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０３

Table of Contents

Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
On models with navigation system

Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a knob and a selector.
KNOB

ENTER

SELECTOR

198

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.

Personalization Setting
When you unlock the doors with
your remote and turn the audio
system on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1
or Driver 2) is detected, and the
radio presets and sound level
settings (see page 205 ) are turned to
the respective memorized mode
automatically.
Voice Control System
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：１９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０４

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Without rear entertainment system

With rear entertainment system

AUDIO DISPLAY

AUDIO DISPLAY
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON

SEEK
BUTTONS

AM/FM
BUTTON

AUTO
SELECT
BUTTON
SEEK
BUTTONS

SCAN
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

PRESET
BUTTONS

POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

TUNE KNOB

AUDIO
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

199

Features

SCAN
BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０５

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

STEREO ICON

BAND

To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.

200

The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
audio display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT .

TUNE ICON

TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the selector
down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
Then press ENTER on the selector,
and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０６

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

SCAN ICON

SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push
the selector down, and then push it
to the right. You will see SCAN
flashing on the screen.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 10 seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to listen to,
press the scan button again, or push
the interface selector to the right
again.

CONTINUED

201

Features

SEEK − The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the − or ＋ SEEK button, then
release it. You can also activate
SEEK by pushing the interface
selector to the right or left.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０７

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.

AUTO SEL ICON

To store a preset memory location:

1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.

202

AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Push the interface selector down to
scroll down the screen, highlight
A.SEL, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will see
AUTO SEL on the screen, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds.

You can also press the A.SEL button.
You will see AUTO SEL on the
screen, and the system goes into
scan mode for several seconds. The
system stores the frequencies of six
AM and twelve FM stations in the
preset buttons.
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To turn off auto select, press
ENTER on the interface selector or
press the A.SEL button again. This
restores the presets you originally
set.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０８

Table of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:

Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.

Features

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.

203

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２０９

Table of Contents

AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.

204

Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１０

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

These adjustments can be made by
the SOUND button or the interface
dial.

Features

Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
SOUND ICON

To adjust them, press the AUDIO
button, push the interface selector
down, and turn the interface knob to
SOUND. Then press ENTER on the
selector.

Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial.
You can also adjust the sound by
pushing the SOUND button
repeatedly. Each mode is shown in
the audio display as it changes. Turn
the TUNE knob to adjust the setting
to your liking.

CONTINUED

205

０６／０８／０２

１０：２７：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１１

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

206

FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.

CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１２

Table of Contents

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

ProLogic ON/OFF settings are
independently controlled for DISC,
XM and AUX sources.

To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,
‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)

The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
To change the SVC mode, select
SVC, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.

207

Features

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
activate when listening to DISC (CDDA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, and
AUX. When ProLogic II is active,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１３

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

Without rear entertainment system

With rear entertainment system

AUDIO DISPLAY

AUDIO DISPLAY
CATEGORY BUTTONS

XM
BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON

SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

CATEGORY
BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB

TUNE KNOB POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
DISPLAY/
MODE
XM
BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON

PRESET
BUTTONS
AUDIO
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

208

PRESET BUTTONS

DISPLAY/
MODE
BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１４

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a
registered trade mark of XM
Satellite Radio, Inc.

Push the AUDIO button to display
XM in formation on the screen. You
can operate XM Satellite Radio
system with the interface selector.

Features

XM Satellite Radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM Satellite Radio also allows you to
view channel and category selections
in the audio display.

Operating the XM Radio

To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turn
the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Push the power/volume
knob to turn on the audio system,
and press the
button. The
last channel you listened to will show
in the display. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
CONTINUED

209

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１５

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes. The
CATEGORY or CHANNEL mode is
displayed on the screen. To switch
the mode with the interface dial,
scroll down, select MODE, and press
ENTER on the selector.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the audio
display changes in the following
sequence: channel name, channel
number, category, artist name, and
music title.
On the screen, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).

210

TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to choose TUNE and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface knob to the same directions.
In the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１６

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
CATEGORY (− or ＋) − Press
either button to select another
category. You can also change by
pushing the interface selector left or
right.

The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, push the
interface selector to the right again
or press the SCAN button to cancel.
Features

SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
SCAN, press the SCAN button. To
scan with the interface dial, scroll
down, and push interface selector to
the right. You will see SCAN on the
screen and audio display.

CONTINUED

211

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１７

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the TUNE or SCAN function
to tune to a desired channel.
XM BAND

Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button or scroll
1. Press the
up by pushing the interface
selector up. Either XM1 or XM2
will be shown on the display.

212

In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the PRESET button until you hear
a beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.

button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１８

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program
information.

‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.

Features

‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or
is not part of your
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
CONTINUED

213

０６／０８／０２

１０：２８：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２１９

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.

Signal weaker in
these areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

214

The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２９：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２０

Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:

There may be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.

Receiving XM Satellite Radio
Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your

radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
and you’ll be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.

CONTINUED

215

Features

Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２１

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

Without rear entertainment system

With rear entertainment system

AUDIO DISPLAY
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON

AUDIO DISPLAY
PRESET BUTTONS

SEEK BUTTONS

SCAN
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB

EJECT
BUTTON
FOLDER
KNOB
DISPLAY/
MODE
BUTTON

DISC BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS

RANDOM
BUTTON
SEEK
BUTTONS

SCAN
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
REPEAT
BUTTON

EJECT
BUTTON
FOLDER
KNOB

DISC BUTTON

AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL

216

INTERFACE DIAL

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２２

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer with the same
controls used for the radio. To
operate the disc changer, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD
verification standards may not be
playable.
The changer cannot play DVD-V
format.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

217

Features

The disc changer can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA)
CD-R/RW
DVD-A
DVD-R/RW
MP3/WMA

The changer can also play MP3 or
WMA format (see page 222 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：２９：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２３

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Loading Discs in the Changer
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
1. With the ignition in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position, press and hold the LOAD
button until you hear a beep and
see ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,
then release the button.
2. Insert a disc into the slot. Insert it
only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way. You
will see the ‘‘BUSY’’ in audio
display. When you insert the first
disc, the changer will start to play
the disc.
3. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
audio display again, insert the next
disc into the slot.
4. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system will

218

then begin playing the last disc
loaded.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
To load a single disc:
1. Press and release the LOAD
button.
2. ‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screen
for an empty position in the
changer. When the green load
indicator comes on and you see
the ‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,
insert the disc into the slot. Insert
it only about halfway; the drive will
pull it in the rest of the way.

You can select the position to load a
disc. Turn the interface knob or
press a preset button to select the
position, then press ENTER on the
selector. This starts the loading
sequence. If you do not select the
position, the system loads the disc to
the first empty position in numerical
order.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２９：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２４

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,
and WMA formats.

CURRENT DISC

Select the changer by pressing the
DISC button. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
disc changer. You will see the
current disc position highlighted.
To select a different disc, press the
corresponding number on the preset
buttons, or turn the interface knob to
highlight the desired disc, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.

Each time you press the DISP button,
the audio display changes from
album name, to track name, to artist
name, and then to normal display
that shows the track number and the
current time. When playing a disc in
MP3/WMA, the display mode
changes from folder name, to file
name, to artist tag, to album tag, to
track tag, and then to normal display.

To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
SEEK (＋) button or push the
interface selector to the right, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the SEEK (−) button or
push the interface selector to the left
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press the SEEK
(−) button or push the interface
selector to the left again to skip to
the previous track. To move rapidly
within a track, press and hold the
SEEK (−) or SEEK (＋) button.

219

Features

When you play CD-TEXT, you will
see the track name, artist name, and
album name on the screen. When
you play MP3/WMA discs, you will
see the track name and folder name
on the screen. If the disc was not
recorded with this information, it will
not be displayed.

If the disc does not carry album,
track, or artist name, pressing the
DISP button changes the display
from normal display to ‘‘NO INFO’’.

０６／０８／０２

１０：２９：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２５

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Choose a Track

CURRENT TRACK

You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. Press ENTER on
the interface selector, and the track
list screen will be shown. If there are
no track names, track numbers are
displayed. You will see the current
track is highlighted. Turn the
interface knob to select the desired
track, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.

220

To exit the track list display, press
the AUDIO button, or push the
interface selector to the left.
Track Scan
When you press the SCAN button or
scroll down and push the interface
selector to the left, the next track of
the current track plays for about 10
seconds. You will see SCAN next to
TRACK on the screen and audio
display. To listen to the rest of the
track, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep or push
the interface selector to the left
again within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next track, plays about 10
seconds of it, and continues through
the rest of the tracks the same way.

Disc Scan
When you press the SCAN button
repeatedly until you see D-SCAN in
the audio display, or push down the
interface selector to the right, the
first track of the current disc plays
for about 10 seconds. You will see
SCAN next to DISC on the screen
and D-SCAN in the audio display. To
listen to the rest of the disc, press
and hold the SCAN button until you
hear a beep, or push down the
interface selector to the right again
within 10 seconds.
If you don’t, the system advances to
the next disc, plays about 10 seconds
of it, and continues through the rest
of the discs the same way. When the
system reaches the last disc, DISC
SCAN is canceled, and the disc plays
normally.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２６

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Disc Repeat
To replay the current disc
continuously, press the RPT button
repeatedly until you see D-RPT in
the audio display, or use the
interface selector to scroll down,
select DISC REPEAT, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see REPEAT
next to DISC on the screen and
D-RPT in the audio display. To turn
this feature off, press and hold the
RPT button until you hear a beep, or
highlight DISC REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

Random Play
To play the tracks of the current disc
in random order, press and release
the RDM button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK RANDOM, and press
ENTER on the interface selector. As
a reminder, you will see RANDOM
next to TRACK on the screen and
RDM in the audio display. To turn
this feature off, press and hold the
RDM button until you hear a beep,
or highlight TRACK RANDOM (if
not already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

221

Features

Track Repeat
To replay the current track
continuously, press and release the
RPT button, or use the interface
selector to scroll down, select
TRACK REPEAT, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. As a
reminder, you will see REPEAT next
to TRACK on the screen and RPT in
the audio display. To turn this
feature off, press and hold the RPT
button until you hear a beep, or
highlight TRACK REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２７

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Pause a Disc
To pause a disc, press the preset
button which corresponds to the
current disc. To play the disc again,
press the preset button again.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of disc mode,
press the AM/FM button the
button, or the AUX button.
To return to disc mode, press the
DISC button.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.

222

Playing a DVD-A Disc
Use the disc controls previously
described.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
The changer plays MP3/WMA files
in recorded order. Each disc can
hold up to 400 playable files within 8
folder layers. When playing MP3
discs, a disc can support a maximum
number of 100 folders, and each
folder can hold 255 playable files.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz
(MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session

The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency: 22.051/32/
44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate and
multi-session
To play an MP3/WMA disc, use the
disc controls previously described,
along with the following information.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２８

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files

Features

Changing the Folders
While playing an MP3/WMA disc,
you can select a folder within the
disc by turning the TUNE knob.
Each time you rotate the knob, the
folder title and its first file’s
information appear in the audio
display in recorded order.

If you use the interface selector, you
can see the list of all the files and
folders within a disc. While playing a
MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO
button. The currently playing folder
and file information comes on the
screen. Turn the selector knob,
highlight the folder you want to see
the information within, and press
ENTER.

Repeat the procedure to go into a
lower folder. If you highlight a file
and press ENTER, the system starts
to play your selected file.

223

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２２９

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN button repeatedly
until you see F-SCAN in the audio
display. You will see SCAN next to
FOLDER and F-SCAN in the audio
display.
To listen to the rest of the folder,
press and hold the SCAN button
until you hear a beep. If you do not,
the system advances to the next
folder, plays 10 seconds of it, and
continues throughout the rest of the
folder same way. When the system
samples the first file of all folders,
folder scan is canceled, and the last
file played comes back.

224

Folder Repeat
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder. To
activate folder repeat mode, press
and hold the RPT button repeatedly
until you see F-RPT in the audio
display, or use the interface selector
to scroll down, select FOLDER
REPEAT by interface knob, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will see REPEAT next
to FOLDER on the screen and
F-RPT in the audio display. To turn
this feature off, press and hold the
PRT button until you hear a beep, or
highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if not
already highlighted), and press
ENTER on the interface selector
again.

Folder Random
This feature, when activated, plays in
the current folder in random order.
To activate folder random play, press
the RDM button twice, or use the
interface selector to scroll down,
select FOLDER RANDOM by
interface knob, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. You will see
RANDOM next to FOLDER on the
screen and F-RDM in the audio
display. To turn this feature off,
press and hold the RDM button until
you hear a beep, or highlight
FOLDER RANDOM (if not already
highlighted), and press ENTER on
the interface selector again.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３０

Table of Contents

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. To begin
playing the disc, press the disc
button.

To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it by pressing
the corresponding number on the
preset button or turning the
interface knob, and pressing ENTER
on the interface selector. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.

Features

Removing Discs from the
Changer
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system automatically enters
the previous mode AM, FM1, FM2,
or XM Satellite Radio. The system
also begins the load sequence so you
can load another disc. If you do not
load another disc, the load sequence
is canceled, and the system
continues playing in the previous
mode.

When you press the eject button
while listening to the radio, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the discs from the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off:
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button.

225

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３１

Table of Contents

Disc Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message
HEAT ERROR
FORMAT

The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.

226

BAD DISC −
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC −
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL

Cause
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３２

Table of Contents

Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.

Features

When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the disc
changer.

Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felttip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc changer.

227

０６／０８／０２

１０：３０：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

Table of Contents

Auxiliary Input Jack
All models except U.S. Entertainment
Package and Canadian Elite Package

The auxiliary input jack is inside the
front console compartment. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.

228

０２３３

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３４

Table of Contents

Remote Audio Controls
Remote Audio Controls

MODE
BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
DISC (if a disc is loaded), DVD video
(if equipped), XM1, XM2, or AUX.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (＋) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
(＋) or bottom (−) of the button for
1 second.

If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(＋) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
To go to the next disc, press the top
(＋) of the button. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous disc.
When you play an MP3/WMA disc,
press the top (＋) of the button for 1
second to go to the next folder. Press
the bottom (−) for 1 second to go
back to the previous folder.

CONTINUED

229

Features

CH
BUTTON

The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３５

Table of Contents

Remote Audio Controls
If you are listening to XM Satellite
Radio, use the CH button to change
channels. Each time you press the
top (＋) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset channel.
Press the bottom (−) to go back to
the previous preset channel.
To go to the next channel of the
category you are listening to, press
the top (＋) of the button for 1
second. Press the bottom (−) for 1
second to go back to the previous
channel.

230

If you are playing a DVD video, use
the channel button to change
chapters. Each time you press the
top (＋) of the button, the system
goes to the next chapter. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press it again to return to the
previous chapter.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３６

Table of Contents

Radio Theft Protection

You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
you will see ‘‘
’’ in the audio
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. The code is
located on the radio code card
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.

The system will retain your AM and
FM presets even if power is
disconnected.

Features

Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.

If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.

231

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３７

Table of Contents

Setting the Clock and Calendar
4. After you set the day information,
pressing the SET button again will
cancel this setting mode and the
system shows the adjusted display.
The system will also automatically
return to the normal display about 10
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
U.S. model is shown

: Press SET

On models without navigation system

You can see the clock and calendar
information on the upper display.
To set the clock and the calendar:
1. Press and hold the SET button
until the clock display begins to
blink.

232

2. Press and release the SET button
repeatedly. The mode switches
from hours, minutes, AM/PM,
year, month, then to day as shown
above.
3. Select the desired mode by
pressing the SET button, then
press either ▼ or ▲ button to
change the setting.

On models with navigation system

The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３８

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Available on U.S. Entertainment
Package and Canadian Elite Package
models

Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.

The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.

you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You should select another
source or insert a DVD.
Rear Speakers
When you turn on the system, the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon both in
the audio display and the overhead
screen. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the wireless
headphones.
If you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until the Rear Speakers
Off icon goes off.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
CONTINUED

233

Features

With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (radio, disc
changer, DVD player, XM Radio, or
optional CD changer/tape player)
than the front seat occupants. The
audio is broadcast through the
supplied wireless headphones.

To Turn On the System
Press the REAR PWR button. The
indicator on the REAR PWR button
will come on, as well as the indicator
on the FRONT SOURCE button.
The rear seat passengers can then
operate the rear system from the
control panel in the ceiling. The rear
control panel can also be detached
and used as a remote control, by
pushing the RELEASE button, and
pulling the remote toward you.
Pressing the REAR CTRL OFF
button disables rear control. The
indicator in the button comes on and
your passengers can no longer
operate the system with the rear
control panel. When the button is
pressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ message
appears in the overhead screen to let
your passengers know that the
control panel is disabled.
The rear system selects the source it
was last set to. If that source has
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),

０６／１１／０８

１０：０２：５６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２３９

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

U.S. Entertainment Package and
Canadian Elite Package models

234

REAR PWR BUTTON

REAR CTRL OFF BUTTON

FRONT SOURCE BUTTON

REAR SOURCE BUTTON

Overhead Screen Unit

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４０

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

If you do not operate the rear
entertainment system from the front
panel within 10 seconds, the
indicator goes off and the FRONT
SOURCE indicator comes on
automatically.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
If discs are loaded in the disc
changer of the upper part, select the
6 DISC button. If a disc is loaded in
the lower player, select the DVD
button.

Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs, audio CDs MP3/WMA
discs and DTS CDs.

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN

Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
CONTINUED

235

Features

To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will
hear two beeps and the indicator in
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.

０６／１１／０８

１０：０３：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４１

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.

U.S. Entertainment Package and
Canadian Elite Package models
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
PLAY − Press the DVD (
)
button if the DVD does not start
playing automatically.
PAUSE − Press the DVD (
)
button to pause the DVD. Press the
button again or press PLAY to
resume. Pause works only with the
DVD player.

EJECT BUTTON
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON

236

０６／０８／０２

１０：３１：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４２

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Each time you press the ＋ button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track or chapter. Press and release
the − button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.

EJECT − Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
To return front panel control to the
front audio system. Press the
FRONT SOURCE button. You will
hear a beep and the indicator in the
button comes on. The indicator also
comes on automatically, when you
do not operate the rear
entertainment system for 10 seconds.

Using the Rear Control Panel
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the PWR button. Use the AM/
FM button, XM RADIO button, 6
DISC button, DVD button, or AUX
button to select the entertainment
source. The selected source will be
shown in the display. Make sure the
rear control operation has not been
disabled with the REAR CTRL
button on the front panel. When the
audio system is off or the front side
rear power is off, the rear control
panel cannot be turned on.

237

Features

SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the
＋ button to move forward; you will
see the time elapsed shown in the
overhead screen advances rapidly.
Press and hold the − button to move
backward; you will see the time
elapsed shown in the overhead
screen decreases. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４３

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
Use the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button to highlight SEEK,
TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, or
one of the preset radio stations on
the overhead screen. You can enter
the highlighted function by pressing
the ENT button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can also
use the
or
buttons to seek
up/down and
or
to tune
up/down.

REAR CONTROL PANEL

To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
You can also use the
or
buttons to change categories
up/down and
or
to change
channels up/down within a category
(in CATEGORY mode) or up/down
for all channels (in CH mode).
Use the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button to highlight CATE (to
change categories), CHAN (to
change channels), MODE (to

238

change category or channel mode),
SCAN, or one of the preset channels
on the overhead screen. You can
enter the highlighted function by
pressing the ENT button. These
functions have the same features as
those of the front audio system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４４

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To change mode, press and hold the
DISP MODE button for 5 seconds.

To Play a Disc in the 6-Disc
Changer from the Rear Control
Panel
If discs are loaded in the disc
changer, select them by pressing the
6 DISC button.
Use the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button to highlight REPEAT,
RANDOM, SCAN,
,
(skip),
, or
(cue) on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENT button. These functions have
the same features as those of the
front audio system.

To change the disc currently playing,
use the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button to highlight your
selected disc icon, and press ENT.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the ▲ or ▼ button changes
the discs.

239

Features

While the overhead screen is closed,
you can see the XM radio
information in the subsidiary display
in the ceiling. Pressing the DISP
MODE button repeatedly changes
the subsidiary display from the
channel number, to the category
name, to the music title, to the artist
name, and to the channel name, and
then back to the channel number.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４５

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
Press the
button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.

240

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN
BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN

Press the
button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the
or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the
button to
move forward, or the
button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.

To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU/SCROLL button.
Use the
,
,
, and
buttons to move to the desired
menu selection, then press the ENT
button to enter your selection.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４６

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
MENU SCROLL Button

Top Menu

When you press the DISP button
while a DVD is playing, the current
statuses of title, chapter, elapsed
time, angle, subtitle, audio, and
sound characteristics, with the
personal surround logo are displayed.
To return to the DVD video screen,
press the DISP button again.

When you press the MENU
SCROLL button while a DVD is
playing, the DVD Menu appears.
The menu options are TOP MENU,
MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH,
and NumInput.

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, the
screen changes to the DVD’s title
menu. This menu also appears when
you press the MENU SCROLL
button while a DVD is not playing.
To go back to play, press the
RETURN button.

Features

DISP Button

If you do not press the DISP button,
the screen returns to the DVD video
screen after several seconds.

To go to your selected menu, use the
or
button to highlight the
icon and press the ENT button. To
return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.

CONTINUED

241

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：４１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４７

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Menu

Play Mode

‘‘Audio’’

When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the
or
button, the screen
changes to the DVD’s title menu.

When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’
with the
or
button, you
can change the DVD’s Audio,
Subtitle or Angle setting.

To change the Audio setting,
highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button and press the ENT
button. A submenu of the dubbed
language appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or
button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.

242

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：４８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４８

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.

‘‘Subtitle’’

Features

Press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu. Press the RETURN button
again to exit completely.

After selecting your desired subtitle,
press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu. Press the RETURN button
again to exit completely.

To change the DVD’s subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button and press the ENT
button. You can see the available
subtitles with the
or
button. Press the ENT button
when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.
CONTINUED

243

０６／０８／０２

１０：３２：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２４９

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
‘‘Angle’’

If there are no multiple angles
available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1’’.

Press the RETURN button or cursor
back with the ▼ or ▲ button to
go back to the top of the Play Mode
menu.
Press the RETURN button again to
exit completely.

To change the view angle, highlight
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button and
press the ENT button. You can see
the available angle options with the
or
button. Press the ENT
button when your desired subtitle is
highlighted.

244

When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ with
the
or
button, the ‘‘Jump
to chapter and title number input’’
message appears. To select
‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, press
the ENT button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５０

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
NumInput

When you ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use
the
or
button to jump to
your desired title and press the ENT
button. When ‘‘Chapter’’ is
highlighted, follow the same
procedure for the chapter search.

A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.

Features

‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’

When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’
with the
or
button, the
‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.
Press the ENT button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.

Select the first digit number using
the ▼ , ▲ ,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.

CONTINUED

245

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５１

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Select and enter the second digit
number the same way. The cursor
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
icon when you press the ENT button.
Press the ENT button to enter the
number command. To go back to the
DVD screen, press the RETURN
button or select EXIT and press the
ENT button.

SETUP Button

When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
DISP ADUSTMENT, ASPECT
RATIO, and PERSONAL
SURROUND.
To change a setup, use the
or
button to highlight your
selection and press the ENT button.
To return to the DVD video screen,
select EXIT.

246

Disp Adjust

To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
the ▼ or ▲ button and press
the ENT button. You can adjust
these display settings:
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Tint
Color

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５２

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features

Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Adjust the setting by pressing the
or
button. When you are
finished with your adjustment,
cursor back to the top of the setup
menu, or press the RETURN button
to exit.

If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button, and,
then pressing the ENT button.

The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.

CONTINUED

247

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５３

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.

Aspect Ratio

You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the
or
button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the
or
button,
then press the ENT button.

248

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５４

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Personal Surround

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the
or
button,
and enter your selection by pressing
the ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.

Features

To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button and
press the ENT button. The effect
selection appears.

CONTINUED

249

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５５

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu

INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)

Menu Language

When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the
or
button, the menu
shown above appears.

To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button.

There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

250

To return to the stop or prestop
screen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the
or
button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５６

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features

Select the desired language by
pressing the
or
button,
and then pressing the ENT button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai,
Japanese or others.

If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.

CONTINUED

251

０６／０８／０２

１０：３３：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５７

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Audio Language

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number digit
using the
,
,
, or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When the
fourth digit is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.

252

If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
display with the
,
,
,
or
button, and press the ENT
button on the control panel. Then
select and enter the correct number
digit as described. The display
returns to the initial ‘‘Language’’
menu screen.

You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the
▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：０７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５８

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)

You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button. You will see the
submenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the top
of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,
the above menu appears on the
screen.

Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features

Subtitle Language

Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.

CONTINUED

253

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２５９

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK

When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the
or
button.

254

When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
▼ or ▲ button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or
button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６０

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Parental Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.

Features

Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and press
ENT button. You will see the
submenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ and
press the ENT button, the screen
goes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
the display changes as shown above.
To change the level, you need to
enter your four digit password.
Select the number for the first digit
by pressing the
,
,
, or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
CONTINUED
control panel.

255

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６１

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Changing the Password

If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.

256

If you enter the password correctly,
you can then change the parental
control level.
Once you correctly enter the
password, press the
or
button to change the level, and
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
when the vehicle left the factory.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６２

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Features

To change the password, select
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by
pressing the
or
button,
then press the ENT button.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Select the first digit by pressing the
,
,
, or
button,
and enter it by pressing the ENT
button. Repeat this until all four
digits are entered. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.

If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
password setting steps until you
enter the correct password.

CONTINUED

257

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：４５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６３

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Remote Control

RELEASE BUTTON

If you forget the password, select
‘‘Password,’’ and press the ▲ button
10 times.

The display changes as shown above.
If you want to use the default
password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
press the ENT button.
The message ‘‘Default password
setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.

258

The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６４

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
COVER

An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Features

If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
Battery type: BR3032

259

０６／０８／０２

１０：３４：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６５

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs

The DVD player can also play discs
recorded in MP3/WMA formats and
DTS CDs.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.

There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.

260

Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.

Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 227 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６６

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.

Cause

DISC ERROR

FOCUS Error

MECH ERROR

Mechanical Error

HEAT ERROR

High Temperature

REGION ERR

Invalid region code

PARENT ERR

Invalid parental
control level

Solution
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consoult your dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consoult your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
system.
Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental
control level (see page 255 )

261

Features

If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.

Error Massage

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６７

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.

Wireless Headphones

VOLUME DIAL

Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.

262

The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
quality and range.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６８

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System
Auxiliary Input Jacks

Replacing Batteries
COVER

Features

TAB

Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.

BATTERY

Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.

Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.

CONTINUED

263

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２６９

Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

VOLUME DIALS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack

264

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７０

Table of Contents

Security System

The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the
outside with the key, the lock tab,
the door lock switch, or the remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator in the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.

The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check that the doors, the tailgate and
the hood are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.

265

Features

The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
it stops. To reset an alarming system
before the 2 minutes have elapsed,
unlock the driver’s door with the key
or the remote transmitter.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７１

Table of Contents

Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.

Using Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL
BUTTON

1. Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

266

3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７２

Table of Contents

Cruise Control

When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle speeds up about 1
mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

CONTINUED

267

Features

Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３５：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７３

Table of Contents

Cruise Control
Even with cruise control on, you can
still use the accelerator pedal to
speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.

Cancelling Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON

Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.

CANCEL BUTTON

You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.

268

Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous cruising speed.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７４

Table of Contents

Compass
Canadian MDX model

Compass Calibration
If you see ‘‘−−’’ in the compass
display and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘
’’ are
shown in the calendar display, the
compass is self-calibrating.
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, do the following.

Press and
hold SET
Press SET
Press ▼
COMPASS DISPLAY

1. Press and hold the SET button for
five seconds until the Clock
display changes to ‘‘ZON? N.’’
(Please note that clock adjustment
mode will be started after the first
two seconds.)
2. Press the SET button. ‘‘CAL? N’’
will be displayed. At this point,
pressing SET button will exist
calibration mode.

3. Press the ▼ button. ‘‘CAL? Y’’ wiil
be displayed.
4. Press the SET button. The
compass display will change to
‘‘−−’’ and ‘‘CAL’’ and ‘‘
’’ are
shown.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
CONTINUED

269

Features

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７５

Table of Contents

Compass
6. When the display goes from
‘‘−−’’ to an actual heading, the
unit is calibrated and the display
returns to normal.

4. Find the zone for your area on the
map.
5. If the zone is incorrect, press the
▼ button to cycle the count down,
or the ▲ button to cycle the count
up. Once the correct zone is
displayed, continue to step 6.

NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.

6. Press the SET button to set the
zone selection.

Compass Zone Selection

In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:

1. Press and hold the SET button for
five seconds until the Clock
display changes to ‘‘ZON? N.’’
(Please note that clock adjustment
mode will be started after the first
two seconds.)
2. Press the ▼ button. ‘‘ZOY? Y’’ will
be displayed.
3. Press the SET button. The zone
the compass is currently in will be
displayed.

270

7. Press and hold the SET button for
about 5 seconds to exit the zone
selection and return display to
normal.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：１９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７６

Table of Contents

Compass

Zone Map

Features

271

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７７

Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and

272

reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.

Training HomeLink
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.

Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.

2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote 1 to 3 feet from
HomeLink. Make sure you are not
blocking your view of the red
indicator in HomeLink.

For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote transmitter
for the device (garage door,
automatic gate, security system, etc.)
has a fresh battery.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７８

Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
RED INDICATOR

4. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
5. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1

second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page 274 ).
7. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).

273

Features

3. Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２７９

Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener is needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.

274

TRAINING BUTTON

4. Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)

3. Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.

6. Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３６：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８０

Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.

Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.

2. Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
274 ).
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

275

Features

You should erase all three codes
before selling the vehicle.

If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：０９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８１

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Your vehicle is equipped with the
HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses
Bluetooth technology as a wireless
link between it and your Bluetooth
compatible cellphone. When you are
in your vehicle and your phone is
linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy
hands-free phone use. The HFL is
available in both English and French
(Canadian models only). To change
the language, see page 300 .
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page 286 .
Voice Control
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
Using Voice Control on page 279 .

276

Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Bluetooth is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL.
The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,
which means the maximum range
between your phone and vehicle is
30 feet (10 meters).
To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
along with the Hands Free Profile.
This type of phone is available
through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
handsfreelink.com. ( In Canada, visit
www.acura.ca.) or by calling the
Hands Free Link customer support
at (888) 528-7876.
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
With a linked phone, the HFL allows
you to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.

Phonebook
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its phonebook.
With a linked phone, you can then
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
On vehicles with navigation system

Your vehicle’s HFL system has the
cellular phonebook import function.
This allows you to import your
cellular phonebook to the HFL.
Using the navigation system, you can
make a call directly and store a
desired number in the HFL from the
list shown on the navigation display.
For more information on how to
import the phonebook or to make a
call, see page 287 .
On all models

You can also store the desired
number to the HFL directly from
your cellphone using the receive
contact function in the HFL.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８２

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Microphone
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, between the front map lights
and the console buttons. On models
with navigation system, the
microphone is shared with the
navigation system.

HFL TALK BUTTON

Features

Audio System
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of HFL buttons or making a
call, the HFL over-rides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob.

HFL Buttons

HFL BACK
BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel.

Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.

The HFL buttons are used as
follows:

HFL Back: This button is used to
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.

HFL Talk: This button is used before
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.

277

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８３

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Multi-Information Display
SIGNAL
STRENGTH

HFL
MODE

BATTERY
LEVEL STATUS

Signal Strength＊ − Indicates the
network signal strength of the
current phone. Five bars equals
full strength.
ROAM Status＊ − Indicates your
phone is roaming.
Battery Level Status＊ − Indicates
the power currently remaining in
your phone’s battery. Five bars
equals full battery strength.

ROAM STATUS

PHONE DIALING

When you are operating the HFL, or
when you manually select HFL on
the multi-information display, you
will see this information on the
screen:

278

HFL Mode − Indicates when you
are dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing − Indicates the
number you entered or the
number of the incoming call.
＊ : Some phones do not send this
information to the HFL.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８４

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
How to Use the HFL
The HFL is operated by the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
basic features of the HFL.

To enter a command, press and
release the Talk button. Then,
after the beep, say your command
in a clear, natural tone.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
When voice commands are used,
the fan speed will be automatically
adjusted to low. However, for
better voice recognition, lowering
the fan speed may be necessary.
Adjust the air flow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
After pressing the Talk button,
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command.

Give a voice command in a clear
natural speaking voice without
pausing between words or
numbers. If the system cannot
recognize your command because
of the background noise, speak
louder.
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
If the HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command a second time, its
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
doesn’t recognize the command a
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.

CONTINUED

279

Features

NOTE: All phones may not
operate identically, and some may
cause inconsistent operation of the
HFL.

Using Voice Control
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８５

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
free link help.’’
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, and 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while the HFL is
speaking. The HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.

280

To go back one step in a command
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the Back button.
If nothing is said while the HFL is
listening for a command, the HFL
will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins from its main menu.

When you finish a command
sequence, the HFL goes back to
its main menu. For example, when
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
stored.’’ The next time you press
the Talk button, you will be at the
main menu.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３７：５２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８６

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Setting Up the System
The voice of the HFL can be set to
male or female (U.S. models only).
Also, the incoming notification can
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification.

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
male or female prompts?’’

4. Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
the notification to be a ring tone or
a prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after
the beep, the HFL returns to its
main menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result
in no ring tone or prompt playback
during an incoming call. The audio
system will still mute, and a
message will be displayed.

5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or
‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFT system
response is ‘‘A ring tone will be
used.’’ or ‘‘An incoming call
prompt will be used.’’
If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will
hear a ring tone through the audio
speakers to announce an incoming
call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
will hear this message to
announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
have an incoming call.’’
6. The HFL response continues ‘‘A
security option is available to lock
the HFL. Each time the vehicle is
turned on, a passcode would be
required to use this system. Would
you like this security option turned
on?’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set
your passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.

281

Features

To set up the system, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８７

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Setting Your Passcode
The HFL will accept a numeric, fourdigit passcode that you can use for
security purposes.
To set your passcode, do this:

1. Follow the system setup
procedure as described previously.
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
3. The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
four-digit number you would like
to set as your passcode?’’

5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Security is
enabled. Each time the vehicle is
turned on, the passcode will be
required to use the system. The
system setup is complete.
Returning to the main menu.’’
6. Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not
be used. The system setup is
complete.’’

cycle. If the passcode is set, its
response is ‘‘The system is locked.
What is the four-digit passcode?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four-digit
passcode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,
4.’’
3. If the passcode is correct, the HFL
response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
passcode is not correct, the HFL
response is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.
Please try again.’’ Go back to the
step 2.

To enter your passcode, do this;

4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
passcode you want to use. For
example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this
correct?’’

282

Once a passcode is set, you can lock
the HFL so it only operates after the
passcode is entered.
1. The HFL will prompt you for your
passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
the passcode once per ignition

If you forget your passcode and you
cannot activate the HFL, consult
your dealer to cancel the passcode.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８８

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Pairing Your Phone
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with HandsFree Profile must be
paired to the HFL before you can
make and receive hands-free calls.

1. With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Phone setup options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
process requires operation of your
mobile phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. State a fourdigit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the
phone.’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Searching for a
Bluetooth phone.’’
NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the
phone’s operating manual.
5. Follow the prompts on your phone
to get it into its Discovery mode.
The phone will search for the HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
CONTINUED

283

Features

NOTE:
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its Discovery mode.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit
handsfreelink.com, call the
HandsFreeLink customer support
at (888) 528-7876 or call your phone
retailer.

During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２８９

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
6. When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone. The HFL response is
‘‘A new phone has been found.
What would you like to name this
phone?’’
7. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’
8. If you want to pair another phone,
repeat steps 1 through 7.
Once the pairing process is
completed, AcuraLink may display a
connection confirmation screen. This
screen is used to create a data
connection between your cellphone
and the AcuraLink system. You can
choose to set up the data connection
now, or do it later. If you want to do

284

it now, exit the HFL menu by
pressing the HFL Back button one
or more times.
To rename a paired phone, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone
would you like to edit?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
new name for Eric’s phone?’’

4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
To delete a paired phone, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
would you like to delete?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
to delete Eric’s phone?’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９０

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
delete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel.’’

To list all paired phones, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’

To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’

To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
for the next phone.’’ The HFL
then disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone. If no other phones are
found, the first phone remains
linked.

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
strength is three bars. Signal
strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all

285

Features

5. Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
deleted.

phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：４２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９１

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Making a Call
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch.
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:

1. With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’

286

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
continue to add numbers.’’
On vehicles with navigation system

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.

You can also make a call directly
from the list shown on the
navigation display.

4. To end the call, press the Back
button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３８：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９２

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.

To redial the last number called by
the phone, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob.

Sending Numbers or Names
During a Call
The HFL allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system. You can also
program account numbers into the
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval
during menu-driven calls.
To send a number during a call, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
add numbers.’’

287

Features

4. To end the call, press the Back
button.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９３

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
To send a name during a call, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Would you like to
send account number?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.

288

Receiving a Call
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
If your phone has Call Waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.

Transferring a Call
During a call, you can transfer it
from the HFL to your phone, or from
your phone to the HFL.
To transfer a call from the HFL to your
phone, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from the HFL to the
phone.
To transfer a call from your phone to the
HFL, do this:

Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from your phone to
the HFL.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９４

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Muting a Call
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
canceled.’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number for account number?’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891.’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
number) has been stored.
Returning to the main menu.’’

CONTINUED

289

Features

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Setting up the Phonebook
The HFL phonebook can store up to
50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types of
numbers. For example, you can store
a phone number and use it to make a
call, or you can store an account
number and use it during a call to a
menu-driven phone system.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９５

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To edit the number of a name, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to edit?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘What is the new number for
Eric?’’
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

290

5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The number has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’

4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’

To delete a name, do this:

To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to delete?’’
3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘The
Phonebook options are store, edit,
delete, receive contact, and list.’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When
the end of the list is reached, the
HFL response is, ‘‘The entire list
has been read. Returning to the
main menu.’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９６

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob.

NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit handsfreelink.com
or See your phone’s owner’s manual
for information.
To store a phone number from your
phone:

1. With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,
edit, delete, receive contact and
list.’’

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Receive
contact.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘The receive process requires
operation of your Bluetooth device.
For safety, only perform this
function while the vehicle is
stopped. HFL is now waiting to
receive contact from a Bluetooth
device.’’
3. Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number？ To discard
this, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

CONTINUED

291

Features

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
says the name you want to call, for
example, Eric, press the Talk
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’

Storing a Phone Number Directly
from Your Phone
You can store the desired number to
the HFL phonebook directly from
your cellular phone.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９７

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
4. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL
reponse is, ‘‘Neil at work will be
stored. Is this correct？’’
5. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neil
at work has been stored. If more
than one number was received for
the contact entry, the HFL asks
for the name of the next number.
If only one number is received, or
all numbers have been stored, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
HFL to receive another contact?’’

292

6. If you want to continue to store
any other numbers, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘HFL is now waiting
to receive a contact from a
Bluetooth device.’’
7. Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number？ To discard
this, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

8. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Susan ar work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be
stored. Is this correct?’’
9. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan
at work has been stored. Would
you like HFL to receive another
contact?’’
10.If you do not want to continue to
store any other numbers, press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘No.’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９８

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
PIN Number. This option allows you
to add, change or remove a PIN
Number for any phonebook that has
been imported.

Cellular Phonebook Options
On vehicles with navigation system

NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit handsfreelink.com
or See your phone’s owner’s manual
for information.

Import Cellular Phonebook: This
option allows you to store the
phonebook of your cellular phone in
the HFL. When you link your phone
to the HFL and select this option, the
system will start importing and
loading the phonebook.
To use the cellular phonebook with
the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular
Phonebook’’ from the Information
screen. The navigation display will
change as shown above.
If any phonebook is not stored and
phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

CONTINUED

293

Features

The cellular phonebook option
allows you to store up to 1,000 names
and 10,000 phone numbers in the
phonebook of HandsFreeLink from
your cellular phonebook. With the
HFL, you can then automatically dial
any name or number in the
phonebook.

０６／０８／０２

１０：３９：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０２９９

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Search Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to search the
phone numbers stored in the HFL.
When you enter keyword for a
person’s name, such as the first
name or last name, the system will
find the number you want and let
you make calls.
Delete Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
select this option, the system will
automatically delete the phonebook
of the linked phone from the HFL
(see page 297 ).

294

To import the cellular phonebook

You can import the phonebook of
your cellular phone in the HFL. Link
your phone to the HFL and select
‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ from
the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. When
the message ‘‘The import was
successful.’’ is displayed, push in on
the Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’

NOTE:
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
For information on linking to the
HFL, see page 283 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３００

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To search the imported phonebook

Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Features

You can search the stored number
by entering keywords to make calls
by using the HFL.
Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.

Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.

Enter the keyword for a person’s
name, such as the first name or last
name, using the Interface Dial. If the
system does not find an exact match,
say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish
entering the keyword.
The system will display a list of
person’s names, with the closest
match to the name you entered at
the top of the list.
CONTINUED

295

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０１

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Select the number (1−6) of the
desired person from the list.
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
person.
If a name has more than three
category icons,‘‘ … ’’ is displayed.

Work

The following category icons will
appear:

Fax

296

Pager

Preference

Car

After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the person’s
phone numbers.

Home

Voice

Select the desired number from the
list to make a call.

Mobile

Other

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０２

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To delete the imported phonebook

Say or select ‘‘STORE IN
HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a
number to call’’ screen. The screen
shown above will appear.

You can delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL.
Link your phone to the HFL and
select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.

Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
Features

To store in the HandsFreeLink

Select the desired number from the
list to store it in the HFL.

Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
CONTINUED

297

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０３

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
After you enter the correct PIN
number, or if the phonebook you
select is not PIN protected, the
following screen appears.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message
‘‘The imported phonebook has been
deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
complete the deletion.

298

To add, change or remove a PIN
number from any phonebook

You can add, change or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the
‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The
display will change as shown above.

To add a PIN number

1. Select the phonebook that you
wish to add the PIN number to.
The phonebook you select cannot
already have a PIN icon. The
display will change as shown
above.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０４

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To change a PIN number

Features

2. Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to
verify.

1. Select the phonebook that you
wish to change the PIN number
for. The display will change as
shown above.

2. Enter your current PIN number.

CONTINUED

299

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０５

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Clearing the System
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
all names in the HFL phonebook,
and all imported phonebooks.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
To clear the system, do this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
3. Enter your new 4-digit PIN
number. You will be asked to reenter the PIN to verify.

300

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, and
clear the passcode. Is this what
you would like to do?’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
clear all paired phones, all
phonebook entries, and the
passcode. This may take up to 2
minutes to complete.’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
period of time, the HFL response
is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
Returning to the main menu.’’

０６／０８／０２

１０：４０：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０６

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
Changing Language
Canadian models only
To change from English to French, do
this:

2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez
selectionne Francais. Les noms
enregistres en mode Anglais ne
seront pas accessible en mode
Francais. Voulez-vous continuer?
You have selected French. Name
tags that were stored while in
English mode will not be
accessible in French mode. Would
you like to continue? ’’

NOTE: If there are paired phones
without French name tags, the
following prompts will continue.

4. The HFL response is, for example,
‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
＜Paul’s phone＞?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
nom Français pour ＜Pat’s
phone＞?’’ Press and release the
Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de
Pat.’’ After all paired phones
missing a French name tag are rerecorded, the HFL will prompt,
‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

If there are paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘Pour que le système
identifie les téléphones qui ont été
jumelés dans une autre langue, les
noms des téléphones doivent être réenregistrés.’’

CONTINUED

301

Features

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘English or French?’’

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’
If there are no paired phones
without French name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Venillez
attendre que le systeme change de
langue. Please wait while the
language is changed.’’ ‘‘La langue
a ete changee. Retour au menu
principal.’’

０６／０８／０２

１７：３７：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０７

Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM
To change from French to English, do
this:

1. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Anglais ou Francais?’’
2. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘You have
selected English. Name tags that
were stored while in French mode
will not be accessible in English
mode. Would you like to continue?
Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Les
noms enregistres en mode
Francais ne seront pas accessible
en mode Anglais. Voulez-vous
contnuez?’’

302

3. Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’
If there are no paired phones
without English name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Please wait
while the language is changed.
Venillez attendre que le systeme
change de langue.’’ ‘‘The language
has been changed. Returning to
the main menu.’’
NOTE: If there are paired phones
without English name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has
been changed. For the system to
identify phones that were paired
while in another language, the
phone names need to be rerecorded.’’

4. The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
is the English name for
＜Téléphone de Paul＞?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for ＜Téléphone de
Pat＞?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
HFL Limitations
In addition, you cannot use the HFL
while using AcuraLink.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：１１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０８

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
U.S. Technology and Sport Packages

Interface Dial
Most AcuraLink functions are
controlled by the interface dial. The
interface dial has two parts, a knob
and a selector.
KNOB

ENTER

The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
Features

AcuraLink enhances your ownership
experience by providing a direct
communication link between your
vehicle and the Acura Server.
Working through the XM radio
satellite, AcuraLink works in
conjunction with the navigation
system, HandsFreeLink (HFL), and
audio system in your vehicle. It
displays and receives several kinds
of messages, including:
Operating tips and information on
your vehicle’s features.
Important recall and safety
information.
Maintenance information to keep
your vehicle in top condition.

SELECTOR

The knob turns left and right. Use it
to make selections or adjustments to
a list or menu on the screen.

Diagnostic information to provide
information about any problems
with your vehicle.

303

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：１９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３０９

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
To view previously read messages:

Reading Messages
If you have new messages, an
envelope icon appears in the top
right corner of the navigation screen.

A list of all messages will be shown.
New Messages will be at the top.
Select the message you want to read
by pressing ENTER.
To open a message:
Press ENTER on the interface
selector, then select New Message
from the navigation system map
menu.

304

Press the INFO button. The
information screen will be shown.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：２７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１０

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Unread messages have a closed
envelope icon next to them. The icon
disappears when it has already been
read.

Message Options

Select ‘‘Messages’’, then select a
message category by pressing
ENTER. Select the message you
want to read and press ENTER.

After purchasing your vehicle,
messages may not appear
immediately.
Your dealer has to register the
vehicle identification before you can
receive messages. This can take
several days to process.

Features

NOTE: Only diagnostic info
messages overlay the navigation
screen while driving. They indicate if
your vehicle has a problem that may
need immediate attention (see page
310 ).

When you open a message, you can
read a summary of it, and then
choose one of several options. If an
option is not available for a message,
that button will not be highlighted.

CONTINUED

305

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１１

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Delete − Select this button to
delete the current message.
Voice − Select this button to hear a
voice read the entire message. This
gives you more information than the
screen can display at one time. When
you select the Voice button, it
changes to a Stop Reading button.
Select the button again to stop the
voice.
Call − Select this button to call a
phone number embedded in the
message. When you select Call, the
HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the
number for you.
To make a call, your Bluetooth
compatible phone must be paired to
the vehicle’s HandsFreeLink system,
powered on, and located within the
vehicle (see page 276 ).

306

Find Nearest Acura Dealer −
Select this button to find the nearest
Acura dealer using the navigation
system.
Call Your Acura Dealer − Select
this button to call the Acura dealer
you purchased your vehicle from.
AcuraLink also directs you to this
dealer so you can schedule a
maintenance appointment or receive
information about a message. If your
assigned servicing dealer changes,
AcuraLink will reset to call that
dealer.

Diagnostic Info − Select this
button to get more information about
the current diagnostic message. To
use this option, your cellphone must
be paired with the HFL. In addition,
the paired phone must have a
compatible data service and be set
up with the AcuraLink system to
make a data connection. Access the
handsfreelink.com website to find
out which data services are currently
compatible with AcuraLink.
Message Preferences
To set your AcuraLink preferences
(the types of messages you want to
receive, if any), visit the Owner Link
website at www.owners.acura.com,
and choose what you would like to
receive. If you do not have internet
access, call Acura Client Services at
(800) 382-2238; they can set your
message preferences for you.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：４５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１２

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Deleting Messages
NOTE: Diagnostic info and recall/
campaign messages can only be
deleted by your dealer.
To delete a single message:
Press the INFO button to bring up
the Information screen.

Select the message category that
contains the message you want to
delete.

NOTE: The Delete All Messages
command does not apply to
Diagnostic Info and Recall messages.
They can only be deleted by your
dealer.
Press the SETUP button to view
the setup screen.
Select MORE by pushing the
interface selector to the right.

Use the interface knob to scroll to
the AcuraLink/Messages button,
and select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.
Scroll to the Delete Messages
option, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
Scroll to the category with the
messages you want to delete, and
select the category by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll up
or down to the message title you
want to delete, and select it by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector.
Scroll to Delete with the interface
knob, and select it by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.

307

Features

Scroll to the Messages option,
then select it by pressing ENTER
on the interface selector.

To delete all messages:

０６／０８／０２

１０：４１：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１３

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Message Categories
There are six message categories in
AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature
Guides, Maintenance Minders,
Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,
and Dealer Appointment Reminders.
The system can store up to 256
messages.

Quick Tips

Feature Guide

These messages, based on updated
vehicle information and comments
from other MDX owners,
supplement your Owner’s Manual
and Quick Start Guide. They provide
you with relevant information for a
safe and enjoyable ownership
experience. For additional
information, call Acura Client
Services directly through the HFL.

During the first 90 days of
ownership, one of up to 32 different
messages appears each day. These
messages help you to use and
understand the features of your
vehicle.

Message categories can be added,
revised, or deleted through
broadcast messages from Acura.

308

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１４

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Maintenance Minder

You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.

Recall/Campaigns

Features

These messages provide detailed
information about the service
needed for your vehicle. When a
maintenance message appears on
the multi-information display, a list of
needed maintenance items also
appears in an AcuraLink message.
These messages tell you the exact
maintenance needed, helping you to
avoid unnecessary maintenance
costs.

If your vehicle is affected by a recall
or other important safety
information, a letter will be mailed to
you about the issue and how to fix it.
If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,
you will also receive a reminder
message through AcuraLink. You
can then use the message options to
call your dealer for an appointment
or to find the nearest dealer.

309

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：０７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１５

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
information.)

Diagnostic Info
When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MultiInformation Display (MID),
AcuraLink can provide information
about the cause of the indicator or
message and the recommended
action to address it. This helps you
handle the problem as it occurs,
preventing or limiting costly repairs.
The AcuraLink system cannot
determine some mechanical
problems (such as squeaks or
rattles) that are not triggered by the
diagnostic indicator monitors.
For more information on the
instrument panel indicators, see page
64 .

310

Depending on the severity of the
problem, the message will let you
know if you should see your dealer
immediately or if you can wait until a
later date.

When an indicator comes on or a
message is displayed on the MID,
AcuraLink immediately notifies you
with the message, ‘‘An indicator is on.
AcuraLink can help you decide what
to do.’’ If you do not want the
information right away, select the
Check Later option. If you want the
information now, select the Check
Now option. (If the navigation screen
is not active, you must select OK
from the navigation disclaimer
screen before you can check the

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１６

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
When viewing a diagnostic info
message through the INFO menu,
you can use the Diagnostic Info
button to connect to the Acura
server to retrieve the latest
information regarding the problem.

Dealer Appointment Reminder

You can then use the message
options to call your dealer for an
appointment or to find the nearest
dealer.

Features

NOTE: There may not be any
additional information depending on
the time elapsed since the previous
time you retrieved the information
from the Acura server.
When you make an appointment
through the Owner Link Online
Scheduling Service, you can be
reminded about that appointment
through AcuraLink in advance. If
you need to reschedule, you can call
your dealer directly with the HFL.
The timing of your reminder is
based on your reminder preference
established on Owner Link.

311

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１７

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
AcuraLink/Message Screen

To access the following functions,
press the SETUP button, push the
interface dial to the right to select
MORE, then rotate the interface dial
to select AcuraLink/Messages.
Delete Messages − Select this
button to delete all stored messages
within a category, except for
diagnostic info and recall campaign
messages. These messages can only
be deleted by a certified technician
after the recall is done or the
problem is corrected, or through a
broadcast message from Acura.

312

New Message Notification −
Select ON if you want to be notified
of new messages (envelope icon
appears on the navigation screen).
Select OFF if you do not want to be
notified of new messages (envelope
icon does not appear on the screen).
Messages can still be accessed using
the INFO menu. If you would like to
stop receiving messages, visit the
OwnerLink website at www.owners.
acura.com to change your messaging
preferences.
Auto Reading − Select ON to have
the system automatically read each
message to you. Select OFF to
manually select the Voice button
when you want a message read to
you.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１８

Table of Contents

AcuraLink
Phone-Data Connection − Select
this button to begin the process
required to connect to Acura. This is
used to access the most recent
diagnostic information when a
problem occurs.

call the Hands Free Link customer
support at (888) 528-7876.

313

Features

NOTE: For the Phone Data
Connection button to be active, you
need a Bluetooth compatible and
enabled cellphone paired to the
HandsFreeLink (HFL), and a
compatible data service (see Pairing
Your Phone on page 283 ).
To find more information on
Bluetooth compatible and enabled
cellphones, visit handsfreelink.com. or

Connect to the Acura Server −
The default setting is prompt. When
a diagnostic info message appears,
and you select the Check Now
button, the system will prompt you
before connecting to the Acura
server. If you do not wish to connect
at that time, select No at the prompt,
and you will see the information
from the onboard database. The
‘‘Auto’’ setting will remove the
prompt when you select the Check
Now button and will automatically
connect to the Acura server. This
setting only applies when you have a
Bluetooth enabled phone that is
paired with the HFL and you have
completed the Phone-Data
Connection setup.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３１９

Table of Contents

Rearview Camera and Monitor
On vehicles with navigation system

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.

314

Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：３６

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２０

Main Menu

Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 316
Fuel Recommendation .................. 316
Service Station Procedures .......... 317
Refueling..................................... 317
Tighten Fuel Cap Message ...... 318
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 319
Oil Check .................................... 320
Engine Coolant Check .............. 320
Fuel Economy ................................ 321
Accessories and Modifications .... 322
Carrying Cargo .............................. 324

315

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２１

Table of Contents

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.

316

Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane of 91 or higher. If this
octane grade is unavailable, regular
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane of 87 or higher may be used
temporarily. The use of regular
unleaded gasoline can cause metallic
knocking noises in the engine and
will result in decreased engine
performance. The long-term use of
regular-grade gasoline can lead to
engine damage.
We recommend quality gasolines
containing detergent additives that
help prevent fuel system and engine
deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４２：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２２

Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures
Refueling
FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER

Push

1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pressing
the button on the driver’s door.
(To open the fuel fill door
manually, see page 433 .)

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. Consult your
dealer.

Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
CONTINUED

317

Before Driving

HOLDER

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２３

Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL
CAP’’ message on the multiinformation display (see right
column on this page), and the
malfunction indicator lamp may
also come on (see page 431 ).

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or

318

replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 431 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：１１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２４

Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures
3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.

Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.

2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to your left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.

319

Before Driving

To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly with
your hands. Make sure it is securely
latched.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２５

Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures
Oil Check

Engine Coolant Check
DIPSTICK

RESERVE TANK

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.

If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 387 .

3. Hold the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel, and then
insert it all the way back in its hole.

320

MIN

MAX

Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 390 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 381 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２６

Table of Contents

Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks (page 381 ).
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear
possible.

Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
ventilation when possible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.
Every time you slow down and
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.

Before Driving

The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.

321

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２７

Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
any accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Acura accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Acura accessories may
fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.

322

Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 438 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２８

Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
aftermarket components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.

Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Before Driving

Some examples are:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Acura suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.

Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a nonAcura suspension kit can affect
the handling and stability.
Non-Acura wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire Pressure
Monitoring System.

323

０６／０８／０２

１０：４３：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３２９

Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
GLOVE BOX

DOOR POCKETS
REAR COMPARTMENT

Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Storage compartment
Rear compartment
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

SEAT-BACK POCKETS
CARGO AREA

324

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３０

Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.

1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 1,158
lbs ’’ on your vehicle’s placard. The
placard is driver’s doorjamb.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
1,158 lbs.

For example, the maximum load is
1,158 lbs and there will be five 150
lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo is 408 lbs.
[1,158 − 750 (5 × 150) = 408 lbs.]
5. Determine the combined weight
of accessories, luggage, and cargo
being loaded in the vehicle. The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, the load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle (see page 356 ).

Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories
cargo must not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or the
gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
Both are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.

325

Before Driving

To determine the correct cargo and
luggage load limit:

4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３１

Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.

326

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you fold down the second or
third row seats, tie down items
that could be thrown about the
vehicle during a crash or sudden
stop.

If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 58 .
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information
that came with your roof rack.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３２

Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be tied down, as the net
may not prevent them from being
thrown about the vehicle in a crash
or a sudden stop.

GROCERY HOOKS

CARGO
HOOKS

The four hooks on the side panels
can be used to install a net for
securing items. Each hook is
designed to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)
of weight.

Your vehicle also has a grocery hook
on each side panel in the cargo area.
They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs
(3 kg).

327

Before Driving

Optional Cargo Cover
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do
not install the cover over the larger
area if the third row seats are not
folded down.

Cargo Hooks

Main Menu

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：２６

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３４

Main Menu

Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 330
Preparing to Drive ......................... 330
Starting the Engine........................ 332
Check Starting System
Message .................................. 332
Automatic Transmission............... 333
Super Handling-All Wheel Drive
(SH-AWD) System .................... 340
Parking ............................................ 342
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 343
Braking System.............................. 348
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 349
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 351
Active Damper System ................. 353
Towing a Trailer ............................ 355
Trailer Stability Assist ................... 367
Off-Highway Guidelines ............... 369

329

Driving

This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the super handling-all wheel
drive (SH-AWD) system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, active
damper system, the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer or drive off-high way.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３５

Table of Contents

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.

330

Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
See page 369 for off-highway driving
guidelines.

Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 140 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：５０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３６

Table of Contents

Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 152 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 124 ).
8. Make sure the doors and tailgate
are securely closed and locked.

Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starting system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:

starter motor runs for about 6 to 9
seconds until the engine starts.
If you hold the ignition switch in
the START (III) position for more
than 7 seconds, the starter motor,
depending on the outside
temperature, runs for about 10 to
25 seconds until the engine starts.

1. Apply the parking brake.

10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the multi-information
display (see page 63 , 72 and
81 ).

2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. Depending on
the outside temperature, the

If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.

The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 128 .

CONTINUED

331

Driving

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 15 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：４４：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３７

Table of Contents

Starting the Engine
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.

Check Starting System Message

Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your dealer inspect
your vehicle.

6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.

The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.

332

If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the
START (III) position manually
until the engine starts. The
ignition switch can be held in that
position up to 15 seconds.

If there is a problem with the
starting system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON (II) position. You
will also see this message when the
auto control mode of the starting
system has a problem.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３８

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.

Shifting

These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in. In the Sequential
SportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicator
next to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on,
and the illuminated number under
the charging system indicator shows
you the gear you have selected.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
82 ).

To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then pull the lever.
You cannot shift out of Park when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

333

Driving

If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３３９

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to D3
D3 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N

Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.

Move the shift lever.

Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the shift lever. Make sure your
foot is off the accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 338 .

334

To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.

Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４０

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

(＋) UP SHIFT

SELECTED GEAR

With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,
you can select the Sequential
SportShift mode to shift gears much
like a manual transmission, but
without a clutch pedal.
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the display
shows the selected gear.

(−) DOWN SHIFT

To enter the Sequential SportShift
mode, move the shift lever further to
the driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’
move the shift lever to the
passenger’s side.
In Sequential SportShift mode, each
time you push forward on the shift
lever, the transmission shifts to a
higher gear. Pull back on the lever to
downshift. The number of the gear
selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.

CONTINUED

335

Driving

When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission starts in first
gear. You have to manually upshift
between first and fifth gears. Make
sure you upshift before the engine
speed reaches the tachometer’s red
zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There
is no automatic downshift when you
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor.

Sequential SportShift Mode

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４１

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission
The transmission may automatically
downshift from the higher gear to
the lower gear under these
conditions:
Driving on level roads and downhill
To shift from

Speed range

4→3

under 19 mph
(31 km/h)

5→4

under 38 mph
(60 km/h)

Driving uphill
To shift from

336

Speed range

4→3

under 34 mph
(55 km/h)

5→4

under 47 mph
(75 km/h)

Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing, and provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
The transmission also shifts
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It downshifts to first
gear when the vehicle speed is under
10 mph (16 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at a
speed that would cause the engine to
exceed the redline in a lower gear,
the transmission does not downshift.
The gear indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to the higher gear.
If the vehicle speed slows to below
the redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission
downshifts, and the display shows
the selected lower gear.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４２

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission
The table shows the speed ranges
for upshifting and downshifting.
To shift from

Starting in Second Gear

To shift from

Speed range

3→2

under 60 mph
(96 km/h)

Speed range

1→2

over 0 mph
(0 km/h)

4→3

under 93 mph
(150 km/h)

2→3

over 10 mph
(16 km/h)

5→4

under 118 mph
(190 km/h)

over 19 mph
(31 km/h)

4→5

over 37 mph
(60 km/h)

If you start out in second gear, the
transmission will be fixed in that
gear.
The transmission will not
automatically downshift to first gear
even when the vehicle speed is
under 10 mph (16 km/h). You need
to shift down to first gear manually.

CONTINUED

337

Driving

3→4

When you are in Sequential
SportShift mode, and the vehicle is
stopped, push forward on the shift
lever to shift to second gear. You
will see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting
out in second gear will help to
reduce wheelspin in deep snow or
on a slippery surface.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４３

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission
Drive (D3) − This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D3
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D3 can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third, fourth, and fifth gears
in stop-and-go driving.
For faster acceleration when in D3 or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one,
two, or three gears, depending on
your speed.

338

Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.

Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４４

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

RELEASE
BUTTON

6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the driver’s side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover next to the
shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or a metal fingernail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry on the edge of the cover.

Driving

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

4. Insert a key into the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.

339

０６／０８／０２

１０：４５：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４５

Table of Contents

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
The super handling-all wheel drive
(SH-AWD) system is a full time allwheel-drive system that
automatically controls and transfers
varying amounts of engine torque to
all wheels independently, according
to the driving conditions.
While the SH-AWD system helps to
enhance the vehicle’s driving
stability in all situations, it is still
your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

SH-AWD Torque Distribution
Monitor
TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

The SH-AWD torque distribution
monitor on the multi-information
display shows you the amount of
torque being sent to the wheels.
Each wheel: right front (RF), left
front (LF), right rear (RR), and left
rear (LR), has its own torque
indicator.

340

Each torque indicator is displayed
as a bar graph divided into 5
segments. The number of
segments represents the amount
of torque distributed to each
wheel.
When there is only a slight change in
torque distribution while driving,
such as cruising on level roads at the
same speed, the torque distribution
monitor may stop displaying the
amount of torque. This is not a
system problem. The monitor will
show the amount if the system
senses any change in torque
distribution.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４６

Table of Contents

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
Your vehicle still has normal frontwheel drive with vehicle stability
assist (VSA), but does not have
the advantages of SH-AWD. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
as soon as possible.

Driving

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while
driving, it indicates the differential
temperature is too high. You will also
see an ‘‘SH-AWD DIFF TEMP.
HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display. If this happens,
pull to the side of the road when it is
safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
idle until the indicator goes out. If
the indicator does not go out, take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it

checked.
If the SH-AWD indicator on the
instrument panel stays on, and the
‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’
message also appears on the multiinformation display, there is problem
with the SH-AWD system.

341

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４７

Table of Contents

Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.

Turn off the lights.

Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb, and set the parking brake.

Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.

Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.

342

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４８

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.

It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure
indicator and message on the multiinformation display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.

CONTINUED

343

Driving

Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator in the instrument
panel to come on. If this happens,
you will see which tire is losing
pressure on the multi-information
display along with a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message.

Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.

０６／０８／０２

１７：２０：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３４９

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The TPMS can misinterpret the tire
pressure because of differences in
the air temperatures. For example, if
you check and fill your tires in a
warm area, then drive in extremely
cold weather, the tire pressure will
be lower than measured and could
be underinflated and cause the
TPMS indicators to come on. Or, if
you check and adjust your tire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tires may become overinflated.
However, the TPMS indicators will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page 409 for tire inflation
guidelines.

Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.

Tire Pressure Monitor

Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
in the owner’s manual (see page
410 ).

To select the tire pressure monitor,
press the INFO button several times
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position.
You will see the above display on the
multi-information display when all
tire pressures are normal.

344

０６／０８／０２

１５：０２：０７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５０

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

To see the inflation pressures of all
four tires, press the SEL/RESET
button. The display changes as
shown above.

Canadian model

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI
(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian
models).

This shows that front left tire is
losing pressure.

345

Driving

U.S. model

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：４１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５１

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure

If any of the tires has low pressure,
the tire pressure monitor also shows
above message to warn you about
the low tire pressure when you select
the display by pressing the INFO
button several times. Following this
display, press the SEL/RESET
button to see each tire pressure.
When you continue driving after
installing the spare tire, you will also
see this message on the multiinformation display.

346

If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the tire pressure monitor shows a
‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’ and
the tire pressure readings are not
displayed. If this happens, first you
will see a system warning message
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ on the
multi-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５２

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on, or the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message, the VSA system
automatically turns on even when
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF button (see
page 352 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF button again.

Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 419 ).

After you replace the flat tire, the
low tire pressure indicator stays on.
This is normal; the system is not
monitoring the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.

347

Driving

When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message may also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after driving several miles
(kilometers).

Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４６：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５３

Table of Contents

Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. Emergency
Brake Assist System increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
applies the brakes slightly. This
builds up heat, and reduces brake
effectiveness and brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.

348

Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.

Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５４

Table of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.

ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 432 .

CONTINUED

349

Driving

The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
may hear some noise. This is normal:
it is the ABS rapidly pumping the
brakes. On dry pavement, you will
need to press on the brake pedal
very hard before the ABS activates.
However, you may feel the ABS
activate immediately if you are trying
to stop on snow or ice.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５５

Table of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.

Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with steering
control during braking.

Test your brakes as instructed on
page 432 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.

ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.

The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.

350

ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５６

Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink. There
may also be some noise from the
modulator.
VSA System Indicator
If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
the road when it is safe, and turn off
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
If the low tire pressure indicator
comes on (see page 343 ), or the
multi-information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message
(see page 82 ), the VSA system
automatically turns on even if you
turn it off with the VSA OFF switch.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.

351

Driving

When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the modulator.

VSA Activation Indicator

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：３１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５７

Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.

VSA Off Switch
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.

VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 413 ).
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
With the VSA off, the trailer stability
assist function is also turned off (see
page 367 ).

352

If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５８

Table of Contents

Active Damper System
U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite
models

The active damper system is always
on, constantly adjusting your vehicle’s
dampers to the best settings for
current road conditions along with
vehicle speed and handling inputs.

Sport mode: The system prioritizes
handling response, vehicle body
control and tire-to-road adhesion to
allow for higher performance
handling.
Comfort mode: The system
prioritizes road isolation to allow for
a more comfortable ride.
Either mode can be used in any type
of operating conditions.

To switch between comfort and
sport mode, press and release the
active damper system button located
on the center console to choose the
desired mode.

CONTINUED

353

Driving

The system uses electrically
controlled dampers to enhance
handling precision, vehicle
composure, tire to road adhesion and
rough road ride comfort isolation.
The system reacts to inputs from
various electronic sensors to give
exactly the right amount of
suspension damping to provide
optimal ride comfort and handling.

The system provides two selectable
modes.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３５９

Table of Contents

Active Damper System
Active Damper System
Indicator
If there is a problem with the active
damper system, the active damper
system shuts down and the active
damper system indicator on the
instrument panel comes on.

When comfort mode is selected, the
green indicator in the button comes
ON, and the message ‘‘COMFORT’’
will appear on the multi-information
display for five seconds.

When sport mode is selected, the
green indicator in the button goes off,
and the message ‘‘SPORT’’ will
appear on the multi-information
display for five seconds.
You will also see the ‘‘CHECK ADS
SYSTEM’’ message appears on the
multi-information display.

354

０６／０８／０２

１０：４７：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６０

Table of Contents

Active Damper System, Towing a Trailer
If you see this warning indicator and
message, have your vehicle checked
at your dealer as soon as possible.
In this case, your vehicle still has the
normal damper function, but it will
not have the active damper function.

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.

Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Driving

Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
369 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.

Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a
trailer stability assist to help stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by
reducing the vehicle speed. For
more information, see page 367 .

355

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６１

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
and cause it to sway.

Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo
and the tongue load is 5,952 lbs
(2,700 kg).

Total Trailer Weight

Tongue Load

The maximum allowable weight of
the trailer and everything in or on it
depends on the number of occupants
in your vehicle and the type of trailer
being towed (see page 358 ).

The weight that the tongue of a fully
loaded trailer puts on the hitch
should be 5 to 10 percent of the total
trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8
to 15 percent of total trailer weight
for all other trailers. (See page
358 for limits for your towing
situation). Too much tongue load
reduces front-tire traction and
steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable

Towing a trailer that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and driven.

356

Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) on the front axle,
and 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg) on the rear
axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 10,053 lbs
(4,560 kg) with the proper hitch. The
GCWR must be reduced 2 percent
for every 1,000 feet (305 meters) of
elevation.

０６／０８／０２

１５：０２：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６２

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page 358 to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.

To Estimate the Tongue Load

MDX and Technology Packages models

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Measure and record the distance
from the ground to the bottom of
the trailer hitch.
3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
4. Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
5. Subtract the second measurement
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.

If the
difference is:

Estimated
tongue load is:

13/32’’
11/16’’
31/32’’
1 1/4’’

150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)

U.S. Sport Packages and Canadian Elite
models

If the
difference is:

Estimated
tongue load is:

1/2’’
27/32’’
1 5/32’’
1 1/2’’

150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)

If the difference is more than 1 ½
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.

357

Driving

Estimating Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described next.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６３

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
Number of
Occupants＊
2
3
4
5
6
7
＊

＊＊

358

Max. Trailer Weight

Max. Tongue Load

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)
4,750 lbs (2,155 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)
4,250 lbs (1,928 kg)
4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)

500 lbs (227 kg)
470 lbs (213 kg)
370 lbs (168 kg)
275 lbs (125 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum trailer
weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 356 ).
Recommended tongue load should be 5−15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６４

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)

1. Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg)

4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 3,064 lbs (1,390 kg)

CONTINUED

359

Driving

3. Check the rear gross axle weight.
Limit: 3,175 lbs (1,440 kg)

5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：３８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６５

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase Acura
equipment whenever possible.
6. Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.

7. Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page 358 .
8. Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from
the weight in step 7.
Limit: See page 358 .
Recommended: see page 356 .
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers
8-15% for other trailers

360

Your dealer offers a trailer package
that includes a hitch, a ball mount,
and a wiring harness.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６６

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Hitch

Trailer Brakes

We strongly recommend that you
have your dealer install a class 3
hitch. Using non-Acura equipment
may result in serious damage to your
vehicle.

Acura requires that any trailer with a
total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455
kg) or more have its own brakes.

Read the trailer manufacturer’s
instructions, and select the
appropriate draw bar for the height
of the trailer you will be towing.
Weight Distributing Hitch

If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.

Have a qualified mechanic install
your trailer brake controller
following the trailer brake controller
manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
to properly install the trailer brake
controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
when towing a trailer.

See your trailer manufacturer for
more information on installing
electric brakes.
CONTINUED

361

Driving

A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.

There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.

A 4-pin gray connector is available as
an option at your dealer. This
connector has all of the circuits
required to install most electric
trailer brake controllers. A jumper
harness to adapt your electric trailer
brake controller to the vehicle is
included with the optional Genuine
Acura trailer hitch kit. To obtain a
connector and a trailer hitch kit, see
your dealer.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４８：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６７

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Use this illustration to identify each
terminal in the trailer brake
controller connector.
ELECTRIC BRAKE
(YELLOW)

BRAKE
(20A)
(BLUE)

Safety Chains

Spare Tires

Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.

When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page 413 for proper
tire size, page 424 for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
419 for information on changing a
flat tire.

Sway Control
GROUND
(BLACK)

STOP
(LIGHT GREEN)

This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors

Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.

362

Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：０６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６８

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
ACCESSORY OPTION

TRAILER BACK-UP LIGHT
BACK-UPLIGHT (−)

ILLUMINATION
LIGHTS

BRAKE
DIAGNOSTIC

RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL

TRAILER HAZARD
LIGHT
＋B CHARGE

Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
Driving

LEFT TURN
SIGNAL

ELECTRIC BRAKE

If you use a non-Acura trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the mating connector and
pins that mate with the connector in
your vehicle from your dealer.

TAILLIGHTS

Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install an Acura wiring
harness and converter. This harness
has been designed for your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.

363

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３６９

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.

364

Your vehicle tires and spare are in
good condition and properly
inflated.
The trailer tires and spare are in
good condition and inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.

Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Break-In Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 316 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：２５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７０

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears

Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use D position when towing a trailer
on level roads. D3 is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘Driving
on Hills’’ on the next page for
additional gear information.)

Gear position

Speed range

0 − 19 mph
(0 − 30 km/h)

19 − 31 mph
(30 − 50 km/h)

31 − 41 mph
(50 − 65 km/h)

over 41 mph
(over 65 km/h)

If the automatic transmission fluid
temperature increases and exceeds
the specified limit, the A/T
temperature indicator comes on (see
page 68 ). You will also see a ‘‘A/T
TEMP HIGH’’ message on the multiinformation display.
Making Turns and Braking

Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses.
Allow more time and distance for
braking. Do not brake or turn
suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.

CONTINUED

365

Driving

When towing a fixed-sided trailer (e.
g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.

When driving uphill and downhill,
use the Sequential SportShift mode
to provide the proper engine power
and engine braking on each gear.
Select fourth, third, second, or first
gear; depending on the vehicle
speeds and road condition. Do not
use fifth gear. The recommended
speed range for each gear position is
shown in the table.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：３５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７１

Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer
Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Retrieving a Boat

When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.

Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.

If the vehicles tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
keep D position and do not use the
sequential sport shift mode. This
prevents the transmission damage.

If the transmission shifts frequently
while going up a hill, shift to D3.

Backing Up

If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D3. Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.

366

Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left. Turn
the wheel to the right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking

Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 433 .

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７２

Table of Contents

Trailer Stability Assist
Your vehicle is equipped with trailer
stability assist function. This
function works on the same sensors
as the vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system. This function helps to
stabilize the vehicle/trailer
combination when the trailer
severely sways or oscillates. For
more information of the VSA system,
see page 351 .

The vehicle/trailer combination is
more affected by crosswinds,
buffeting, and improper tongue load.
These conditions can make the
trailer unstable, and cause it to sway.

When the brakes are applied, the
trailer’s brake lights come on along
with the vehicle brake lights.
When the trailer stability assist
activates, you will see the VSA
activation indicator blink. There may
also be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system.

Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
a loss of control. Always reduce the
vehicle speed and steer firmly. Do
not brake suddenly or make quick
steering motion. It could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over and
the system becomes ineffective.
Trailer stability assist cannot prevent
swaying that can occur in crosswinds
and in normal and emergency
driving maneuvers. It helps only to
stabilize the vehicle/trailer
combination in these conditions,
after the oscillation becomes severe.
Trailer stability assist will also be
ineffective while driving at high
speed or towing a trailer with a high
center or gravity.
Always obey the recommended
speed limits for towing a trailer, see
page 365 .

367

Driving

If the function detects the vehicle/
trailer instability, it checks if the
swaying is caused by the trailer, and
if the trailer swaying or oscillation is
increasing.

Under these conditions, trailer
stability assist begins to stabilize the
vehicle/trailer combination by
reducing the vehicle speed. The
control unit sends signals to
selectively apply the brakes and
regulate the engine output. The
brake lights of your vehicle will be
turned on automatically by the
system even if you do not keep the
pressure on the brake pedal.

０６／０８／０２

１０：４９：５２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７３

Table of Contents

Trailer Stability Assist
Trailer Stability Assist Failure

In this case, your vehicle still has the
VSA traction and stability
enhancement, but it will not have the
trailer stability assist function.
If there is a problem with the VSA
system, the system and Trailer
Stability Assist shuts off. The VSA
system and VSA activation indicators
also come on (see page 351 ).
The ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator may also come on
along with the VSA system indicator.

The control unit monitors the VSA
circuitry and the braking system. If
there is a problem with the brake
lighting system, the trailer stability
assist function shuts down and the
‘‘CHECK TRAILER STABILITY
ASSIST’’ message appears on the
multi-information display.
If you see this message, have your
vehicle checked at your dealer as
soon as possible.

368

If you see these warning indicators,
have your vehicle checked at your
dealer as soon as possible.

If you turn off the VSA, the trailer
stability assist function also shuts off.
Press and hold the VSA off switch
until you hear a beep (see page 352 ).
The VSA activation indicator comes
on as a reminder. Press and hold the
switch again to turn the system on.
The function turns on every time you
start the engine along with the VSA,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７４

Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.

Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.

Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page 325 and 327 ).
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.

369

Driving

General Information
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance and
super handling-all wheel drive (SHAWD) system allow you to
occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and
similar locations. It is not designed
for trailblazing, mountain climbing,
or other challenging off-road
activities.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：１４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７５

Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.

370

Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in D position will help you
have a smoother start on snow or ice.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Avoiding Obstacles
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.

Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
Crossing a Stream
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：２５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７６

Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed, and proceed without shifting,
changing speeds, stopping, or
shutting off the engine.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
If You Get Stuck
If you get stuck, carefully try to go in
the direction (forward or reverse)
that you think will get you unstuck.
Do not spin the tires at high speeds.
It will not help you get out and may
cause damage to the transmission or
SH-AWD system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose.
Use a nylon strap to attach the MDX
to the recovery vehicle and carefully
take out the slack in the strap. Once
the strap is tight, the recovery
vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid

becoming stuck, too.
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
You may be able to safely tow a
lightweight trailer (such as a
motorcycle or small tent trailer) offroad if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.

371

Driving

The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushing water can wash the
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.

Main Menu

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：３３

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７８

Main Menu

Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance messages in the multiinformation display, a maintenance
record, and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.

373

Maintenance

If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 463 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety ....................... 374
Maintenance Minder ..................... 375
Maintenance Record ..................... 383
Fluid Locations............................... 385
Engine Compartment Cover ........ 386
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 387
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 388
Engine Coolant ............................... 390
Windshield Washers ..................... 392
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 393
Brake Fluid ..................................... 395
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 396
Timing Belt ..................................... 396
Lights .............................................. 397
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 403
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 403
Floor Mats ...................................... 404
Wiper Blades .................................. 405
Wheels ............................................ 408
Tires ................................................ 409
Checking the Battery .................... 415
Vehicle Storage .............................. 416

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３７９

Table of Contents

Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.

Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the

374

engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.

Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８０

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder
One of the most convenient and
important features of the multiinformation display on your vehicle
is the maintenance minder.

Engine Oil Life

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

Based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life.

To see the remaining engine oil life
displayed on the multi-information
display as a percentage, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. Make sure the display
shows blank, SH-AWD and tire
pressure, and then press the SEL/
RESET button on the steering wheel
repeatedly until the engine oil life
appears (see page 73 ).

Calculated Engine
Displayed
Oil Life (%)
Engine Oil Life
(%)
100% − 91%
100%
90% − 81%
90%
80% − 71%
80%
70% − 61%
70%
60% − 51%
60%
50% − 41%
50%
40% − 31%
40%
30% − 21%
30%
20% − 16%
20%
15% − 11%
15%
10% − 6%
10%
5% − 1%
5%
0%
0%

CONTINUED

375

Maintenance

The system also displays the code
for other scheduled maintenance
items needing service.

The remaining engine oil life is
displayed according to the table
shown below.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５０：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８１

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS

When the remaining engine oil life is
15 to 6 percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ message along with the
maintenance schedule code
indicating the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change.
Refer to page 382 for a complete list
of the maintenance main items and
sub items.

376

When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5
percent, the multi-information
display shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ message with the same
maintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ was displayed with. When
you see this message have the
indicated maintenance performed as
soon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘5%’’, and the
maintenance item code are displayed
on the lower part of the multiinformation display when the
calculated engine oil life is 1−5
percent (see page 375 ).

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８２

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the oil life minder as previously
described.
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.
Press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly to select
the engine oil life. The message
‘‘SERVICE’’, along with ‘‘0 %’’, and
the maintenance item code are
displayed on the lower part of the
multi-information display when the
calculated engine oil life is 0−1 %.

CONTINUED

377

Maintenance

If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the remaining engine
oil life reaches 0 %, the multiinformation display will show the
message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’
and the maintenance item code(s).
This message is displayed when the
total mileage is less than 10 miles
(for U.S. models)/10 km (for
Canadian models) after the engine
oil life became 0 %.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８３

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE
U.S.

CANADA

MAINTENANCE CODE

If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0 %, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total mileage after the remaining
oil life became 0 %, and the
maintenance item code(s).

378

This message is displayed when you
drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)
or 10 km (for Canadian models)
after seeing the 0 % message.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as previously described.
The message will be canceled if the
▼ or ▲ button on the steering wheel
is pressed. Press the ▼ or ▲ button
to see the message again.

U.S.

CANADA
TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

When you press the SEL/RESET
button to select the engine oil life,
the message ‘‘SERVICE’’, along with
the maintenance item code and the
total negative mileage after the oil
life became 0 %, will be displayed on
the lower part of the multiinformation display.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８４

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items

MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS

All the maintenance items displayed
in the multi-information display are
in code.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page 382 .

more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.

If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. If the engine oil life is not
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly the multi-information
display shows blank, SH-AWD and
tire pressure.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for

4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

379

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS

Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８５

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Acura dealer knows
your vehicle best and can provide
competent, efficient service.

380

However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.

We recommend the use of Acura
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８６

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.

Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 397 .

Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 320 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 320 .

Maintenance

According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with ＃ will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed in accordance
with the intervals indicated by the
Multi-Information Display.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.

Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
393 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 395 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
410 .

381

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８７

Table of Contents

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Sehedule for Normal Conditions

Symbol
A
B

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil1
Replace engine oil1and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check praking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃

Symbol
1
2

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from
diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid

1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12
months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first
column on page 461 .

NOTE :

382

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

5
6

Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under−20°F, −29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every
60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires
differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you
regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,
have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles
(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８８

Table of Contents

Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your-Acura maintenance journal.
Maintenance
Performed

Mileage

Signature

Mileage

Maintenance
Performed

Signature

Date

mi
km

Maintenance

mi
km

CONTINUED

383

０６／０８／０２

１０：５１：５９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３８９

Table of Contents

Maintenance Record
Maintenance
Performed

Mileage

Signature

Mileage

Maintenance
Performed

Signature
Date

Date

384

mi
km

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９０

Table of Contents

Fluid Locations

BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)

POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)

ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)

RADIATOR CAP

385

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９１

Table of Contents

Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine
compartment are protected by the
cover. You may need to remove the
cover when you perform some
simple maintenance work.
Cover is secured by holding clips.
To remove the front bulkhead cover,
remove the holding clips with a flattipped screwdriver.

386

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER
HOLDING CLIP

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９２

Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.

Maintenance

Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Ambient Temperature

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

387

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：２５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９３

Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil, it
displays the API Certification Seal
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule.

Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can
damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.

Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.

Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

388

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９４

Table of Contents

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER

6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
7. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4. Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.
5. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.

8. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.

Maintenance

3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.

Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.

9. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
10. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.

389

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：４０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９５

Table of Contents

Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant

MAX
MIN

If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

390

Always use Honda Long-Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.

If Honda Long-life antifreeze/
coolant is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Long-life antifreeze/coolant
as soon as possible.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９６

Table of Contents

Engine Coolant

RADIATOR CAP COVER

RADIATOR CAP

4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Maintenance

1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.

3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.

2. Remove the radiator cap cover.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
CONTINUED

391

０６／０８／０２

１０：５２：５７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９７

Table of Contents

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

MAX

Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
If the washer fluid is low, a
‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display.

RESERVE TANK

MIN

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

392

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.

Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９８

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is shown on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.

DIPSTICK

Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.

DIPSTICK

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.

CONTINUED

393

Maintenance

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator fan comes on, then
shut off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but don’t
wait longer than 90 seconds.

UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０３９９

Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s
not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.

394

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：１６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４００

Table of Contents

Brake Fluid
Replace the brake fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message in the multi-information
display.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.

MAX

The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.

395

Maintenance

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

MIN

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：２６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０１

Table of Contents

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL

Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.

LOWER LEVEL

Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

396

If you are not sure how to add
fluid, contact your dealer.

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.

Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km) if you regularly drive
your vehicle in one or more of these
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
If you frequently tow a trailer.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：３６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０２

Table of Contents

Lights
Headlight Aiming
MDX and Technology Packages models

The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.

BULB

CONNECTOR

3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.

1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover
(see page 386 ).

4. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

CONTINUED

397

Maintenance

Low Beam Headlight Bulb
Replacement
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
replaced.

Replacing a High Beam Headlight
Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０３

Table of Contents

Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.

Replacing Front Turn Signal/
Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

BULB

PARKING LIGHT

BULB

7. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.

SOCKET

1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover
(see page 386 ).
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.

SOCKET

5. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
6. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.

398

０６／０８／０２

１０：５３：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０４

Table of Contents

Lights

SIDE MARKER LIGHT

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the
glass can cause the bulb to overheat
and shatter.

BOLT

HOLDING
CLIPS

1. Remove the bolt and use the flattipped screwdriver to remove the
holding clips located under the
front bumper.
2. Push down the inner fender.

CONTINUED

399

Maintenance

SOCKET

BULB

Replacing Front Fog/Daytime
Running Light Bulbs
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：０３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０５

Table of Contents

Lights
CONNECTOR

Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Rear Pillar)
COVER

BOLT

INNER FENDER

3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
4. Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it onequarter turn counterclockwise.

400

BOLT

1. Open the tailgate. Use a
screwdriver protected with a cloth
to pry open the two covers.

2. Remove the two bolts, and remove
the rear light assembly from the
rear pillar.
3. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: turn signal/hazard
lights or side marker light.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０６

Table of Contents

Lights
6. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb

7. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
8. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.

SOCKET

4. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.

COVER

1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the light assembly
cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.

CONTINUED

401

Maintenance

BULB

9. Install the rear light assembly in
the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts. Snap the bolt covers into
position.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：２２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０７

Table of Contents

Lights

BULB

6. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Place the cover back into the light
assembly. Push it up until it locks
in place.

SOCKET

2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.

402

Side Turn Signal Light
Each outside mirror has side turn
signal lights. The lights should be
replaced by your dealer.
Rear License Plate Bulb
The license plate has two lights
above it. The bulbs should be
replaced by your dealer.

０６／０８／０３

１７：０７：２０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０８

Table of Contents

Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control
system.

LOOP

Maintenance

Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message in the multiinformation display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the climate control system becomes
less than usual.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.

403

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：３４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４０９

Table of Contents

Floor Mats

Front

The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
This keeps the floor mats from
sliding forward or backward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.

404

Rear

A non-Acura floor mat may not fit
your vehicle properly. This could
prevent the proper operation of the
passenger’s seat weight sensors. We
recommend using genuine Acura
floor mats. Do not put additional
floor mats on top of the anchored
mat.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１０

Table of Contents

Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.

Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.

2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade, make
sure not to drop the wiper blade or
wiper arm down on the windshield.
CONTINUED

405

Maintenance

To replace the front wiper blades:

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１１

Table of Contents

Wiper Blades
BLADE

BLADE

5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.

REINFORCEMENT

3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.

406

4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５４：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１２

Table of Contents

Wiper Blades
WIPER ARM

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.

2. Slide the blade out of the wiper
arm.

3. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.

CONTINUED

407

Maintenance

To replace the rear wiper blade:

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１３

Table of Contents

Wiper Blades, Wheels
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.

4. Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
5. Lower the wiper arm.

408

Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：１３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１４

Table of Contents

Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.

Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.

Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.

Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.

Maintenance

Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.

Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.

The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) will warn you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 343 for
information on the TPMS.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires everyday. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
CONTINUED

409

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：２３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１５

Table of Contents

Tires
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressure.
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal; do not
release air to match the cold
pressure.

Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured. You
should look closely for punctures if a
tire starts losing pressure.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.

Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Size
P255/55R18 104H

Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )

The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 448 .

410

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：３２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１６

Table of Contents

Tires
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.

Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.

Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.

Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

411

Maintenance

Excessive tread wear.

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：４１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１７

Table of Contents

Tires
Tire Rotation
Front

Front

(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)

To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the multi-information display. Move
the tires to the positions shown in
the diagram each time they are
rotated. If you purchase directional
tires, rotate only front-to-back.

412

Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).

It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.

The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.

Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.
Replacement wheels are available at
your Acura dealer.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：４９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１８

Table of Contents

Tires

Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.

Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheel:
18 x 8 J
Tires:
P255/55R18 104H
See page 448 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
450 for tire size and labeling
information.

Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.

Maintenance

413

０６／０８／０２

１０：５５：５５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４１９

Table of Contents

Tires
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.

Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Acura strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below.
SCC Super Z-6＃SZ 435
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.

414

Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２０

Table of Contents

Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.

The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 231 ).

415

Maintenance

Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window:
Green − Good condition
White − Liquid level low, replace
battery
Black − Charging necessary

Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２１

Table of Contents

Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.

Fill the fuel tank.

Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).

Change the engine oil and filter.

Disconnect the battery.

Wash and dry the exterior
completely.

Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.

Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.

416

To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：１６

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２２

Main Menu

Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire....................... 418
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 419
If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 425
Jump Starting ................................. 426
If the Engine Overheats ............... 428
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 430
Charging System Indicator........... 430
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 431
Brake System Indicator ................ 432
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ..................................... 433
Emergency Towing ....................... 433
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 434
Fuses ............................................... 436
Fuse Locations ............................... 440
Taking Care of the Unexpected

417

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：２５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２３

Table of Contents

Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.

Do not mount snow chains on a
compact spare.

Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.

Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.

418

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.

The low tire pressure indicator
stays on when you are driving with
the compact spare tire. The TPMS
indicator may also come on after
several miles (kilometers) driving.

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２４

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.

JACK

TOOLS

SPARE TIRE

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.

4. Push the rear edge of the handle
to raise the handle loop and pull up
the loop to raise the cargo area
floor.

3. Open the tailgate.
CONTINUED

419

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.

CARGO AREA
FLOOR

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２５

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
PLASTIC COVER

KNOB

COVER

5. The tools and jack are under the
cargo area behind a cover on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
turning the knobs
counterclockwise, then pulling out
the cover.

420

6. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.

7. The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover on the
cargo area lining to access the
shaft for the spare tire hoist.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２６

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

BRACKET

9. Keep turning the wheel nut
wrench to create slack in the cable.
10.Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.

8. Put the wheel nut wrench on the
hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
CONTINUED

421

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to f it
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other
tool.

11.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５６：５４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２７

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION

JACKING POINT

12. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

422

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

13. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
14.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire.

BRAKE HUB

15.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２８

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
20.Place the flat tire face up under
the hoist.

16.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.

21.Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.

17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.

19.Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
CONTINUED

423

Taking Care of the Unexpected

18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：０８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４２９

Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
24.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover.
22.Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise to take up the slack of
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracket is seated in the center
hole of the flat tire.
23.Turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.

424

25.Refer to Changing a Tire with
TPMS (see page 347 ).

Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：１９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３０

Table of Contents

If Your Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 426 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 433 .

If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 415 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
426 ).
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly (see page 69 ).
CONTINUED

425

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：２９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３１

Table of Contents

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 331 .

Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the warning indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 436 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 433 .

A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.

426

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, audio system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：３７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３２

Table of Contents

Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

BOOSTER BATTERY

3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (＋) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (＋)
terminal on the booster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the engine hanger as
shown. Do not connect this jumper
cable to any other part of the
engine.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

427

Taking Care of the Unexpected

The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.

7. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
the engine hanger on your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：４５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３３

Table of Contents

If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason.
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.

Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.

428

Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５７：５３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３４

Table of Contents

If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 433 ).
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.

Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.

10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 433 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

429

Taking Care of the Unexpected

7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.

9. Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３５

Table of Contents

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.

Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.

430

1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 320 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 387 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
433 ).

Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 81 ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：１２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３６

Table of Contents

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.

If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 81 ).
Readiness Code
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to State
Emissions Testing for more
information (see page 456 ).

431

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：２１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３７

Table of Contents

Brake System Indicator
Brake System Indicator
The brake system indicator
U.S.
normally comes on when
you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position, and
Canada as a reminder to check the
parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully
release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 395 ).
You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKE
FLUID’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).

432

If the fluid level is low, take the
vehicle to your dealer and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 81 ).

Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３８

Table of Contents

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually, Emergency Towing
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.

LID

RELEASE LEVER

To open the fuel fill door, pull the
release lever rearward.
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the
all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle
should be transported on a f lat-bed
truck or trailer.

433

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If the fuel fill door release button
does not work, use the release lever
inside the rear fuse box lid in the
cargo area.

The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：３５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４３９

Table of Contents

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,
mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page).

Front

COVER

Rear

COVER

For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
detachable towing hook that mounts
on the anchors in the front and rear
bumpers.

1. Remove the cover, put cloth on the
edge of the cover and carefully pry
with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver or a metal fingernail
file.

434

The cover is attached to the bumper
with a tether.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：４１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４０

Table of Contents

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use
the towing hook f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. The tow hook should not be used
to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do
not use it as a tie down.

Front

TOWING HOOK

Rear

TOWING HOOK

Taking Care of the Unexpected

2. Remove the towing hook and
wheel nut wrench placed behind a
cover under the cargo area.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
hole, and tighten it with the wheel
nut wrench.

435

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：５１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４１

Table of Contents

Fuses
INTERIOR

LID

PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR

LID

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)

TAB

The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes.

The rear fuse box is located at the
left side of cargo area.

The interior fuse box is underneath
the dashboard on the driver’s side.

The primary under-hood fuse box is
located on the driver’s side. The
secondary fuse box is next to the
battery.

To remove the fuse box lid, put your
finger in the notch on the lid, pull it
toward you, and take it out of its
hinges.

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

To open it, push the tabs as shown.

TAB

436

０６／０８／０２

１０：５８：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４２

Table of Contents

Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
440 , 441 , and 442 , or the diagram
on the fuse box lid, which fuse or
fuses control that device. Check
those fuses first, but check all the
fuses before deciding that a blown
fuse is the cause. Replace any blown
fuses, and check if the device works.

2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.

BLOWN

3. Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.

FUSE

437

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：０４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４３

Table of Contents

Fuses
BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and rear
fuse box, and all the fuses in the
interior fuse box by pulling out
each one with the fuse puller
provided in the primary underhood fuse box.

438

5. Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned out, replace it
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：０９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４４

Table of Contents

Fuses

Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.

If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 231 ).

Taking Care of the Unexpected

6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.

439

０６／０８／０２

１２：４３：５６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４５

Table of Contents

Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

2−1
2−2
2−3
2−4
2−5
2−6

120 A
−
−
−
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A

2−7

40 A

2−8
3−1

−
60 A

3−2

40 A

3−3

60 A

3−4

50 A

Circuits Protected
Main fuse
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Blower Motor
ABS VSA
Trailer Main
Power Seats, Driver’s
Position Memory System,
Subwoofer
Front Heated Seat, TPMS,
Moonroof, Driver’s Lumber
Support
Not Used
Fog Lights, Front Blower
Motor
Headlights, Daytime
Running Lights
Cooling Fan, Condenser Fan,
MG Clutch, Headlight
Washer＊
Ignition Switch Main

＊: Canadian model

440

No. Amps.
3−5
3−6

50 A
60 A

3−7
3−8
4

30 A
−
40 A

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

−
−
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A

Circuits Protected
Power Window
SH-AWD, Power Tailgate
Open/Closer, Rear ACC
Socket, Cargo Area Light,
Rear Defroster
ECU (PCM)
Not Used
Audio, Door Lock, Interior
Lights
Not Used
Not Used
Active Damper Control Unit
Audio Amplifier
Rear Entertainment System
Hazard
Horn, Stop
ABS VSA
Trailer (Brake)
Rear Heated Seat
A/C Inverter

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：２４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４６

Table of Contents

Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

REAR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

No. Amps.
10 A
10 A

3
4

10 A
10 A

Left Daytime Running Light
Right Daytime Running
Light
Left Headlight High
Right Headlight High

7.5 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
40 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A

Small Lights (Exterior)
Headlight Low Main
Cooling Fan Timer
IGP
IG Coil
DBW
AFHT
Front Blower Motor
Fog lights
Headlight Washer＊
Condenser Fan
Cooling Fan
MG Clutch
Left Headlight Low
Right Headlight Low
Small Lights (Interior)

＊: Canadian model

No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

−
−
−
−
10 A
20 A
−
10 A
30 A
30 A
40 A

Circuits Protected
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Rear ACC Socket
Power Tailgate
Not Used
Cargo Area Light
SH-AWD
Rear Defroster
Power Tailgate

Taking Care of the Unexpected

1
2

Circuits Protected

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
22

Circuits Protected

441

０６／０８／０２

１２：４４：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４７

Table of Contents

Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.

Auxiliary

No. Amps.
1
2

7.5 A
10 A

3
4
5

10 A
20 A
10 A

Circuits Protected
TPMS
Driver’s Lumber Support
Motor
Moonroof
Front Heated Seats
Audio

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

7.5 A
10 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
30 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A

7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Interior Light
Interior Light, Moonroof
Door Lock
ACC Socket
IG Coil
Windshield Wiper
Subwoofer
Passenger’s Power Recline
Driver’s Power Slide
Telescope Steering Wheel
Driver’s Power Recline
Passenger’s Power Slide
Alternator
Fuel Pump
SH-AWD, Active Damper
Control Unit
Gauges

No. Amps.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

10 A
−
20 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
10 A
10 A

15 A

32
33

10 A
−

SRS
Not Used
Left Rear Power Window
Right Rear Power Window
Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Tilt Steering Wheel
ABS VSA
A/C
Headlight Auto Leveling,
Rear Wiper, Windshield/
Rear Washer
ACC
Not Used

Auxiliary
No. Amps.
1
2

442

Circuits Protected

7.5 A
7.5 A

Circuits Protected
Starter DIAG
STS

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：３７

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４８

Main Menu

Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ................. 444
Specifications ................................. 446
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 448
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 448
Treadwear .................................. 448
Traction....................................... 448
Temperature .............................. 449
Tire Labeling .................................. 450
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 451

443

Technical Information

Emissions Controls........................ 453
The Clean Air Act ...................... 453
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 453
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 453
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 453
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 454
PGM-FI System ..................... 454
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 454
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 454
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 454
Replacement Parts..................... 454
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 455
State Emissions Testing ............... 456

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：４１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４４９

Table of Contents

Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

444

０６／０８／０２

１０：５９：４６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５０

Table of Contents

Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.

ENGINE NUMBER

The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.

Technical Information

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

445

０６／０８／０２

１１：００：０２

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５１

Table of Contents

Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track

Front
Rear

Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight＊1
rating (GCWR)

190.7 in (4,844 mm)
77.0 in (1,955 mm)
68.2 in (1,733 mm)
108.3 in (2,750 mm)
67.7 in (1,720 mm)
67.5 in (1,715 mm)

See the tire information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
10,053 lbs (4,560 kg)

＊1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g)
ND-OIL8

Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil

＊1

Change
Total
Change＊2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
Rear
Change
differential
Total
fluid
Transfer
Change
assembly
Total
fluid
Windshield
U.S. vehicles
washer
Canadian
reservoir
vehicles

Approx.
21.00 US gal (79.5 )
1.93 US gal (7.3 )
2.43 US gal (9.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
3.0 US qt (2.8 )
8.6 US qt (8.1 )
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
2.9 US qt (2.7 )
0.4 US qt (0.4 )
0.4 US qt (0.4 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
6.7 US qt (6.3 )

＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

446

０６／０８／０２

１１：００：３０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５２

Table of Contents

Specifications
Lights
Headlights

High
Low＊

Daytime running light
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights
Fog light
Front foot lights
Rear turn signal lights
Rear side marker light
Backup lights
License plate lights
Individual map lights
Front
Rear
Cargo area light
Tailgate light
Vanity mirror light
Door light

12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

60 W (HB3)
35 W (D2S)
60 W (HB3)
3 CP
21 W
3 CP
55 W (H11)
3.4 W
21 W
3 CP
18 W
3 CP
5W
5W
8W
5W
2W
3.4 W

Battery
Capacity

Rear

Under-hood

Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs

Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
Caster

12 V − 65 AH/5 HR
12 V − 76 AH/20 HR

See page 442 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 441 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 440 and 441 or the fuse
box cover.

Tires
Size
Pressure

Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front

Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
VTEC V6 gasoline engine
3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)
223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )
11.0 : 1
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
NGK:
IZFR6K-11

0.00 in (0.0 mm)
IN 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
−0°30’
−0°30’
4°12’

P255/55R18 104H
T165/80D17 104M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

447

Technical Information

＊ : The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type.
Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed by
your dealer.

Fuses
Interior

０６／０８／０２

１１：００：３９

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５３

Table of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.

448

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.

０６／０８／０２

１１：００：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５４

Table of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

Technical Information

Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

449

０６／０８／０２

１１：００：５８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５５

Table of Contents

Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.

18 − Rim diameter in inches.

FW6X − Tire type code.

104 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).

2202 − Date of manufacture.

Tire Size

Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. The following is an
example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component
means.
P255/55R18 104H
P

− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).

H − Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).

Maximum Tire Load
Tire Identification Number

The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202

255 − Tire width in millimeters.
DOT
55 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R

− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).

450

Maximum Tire Pressure

Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.

−This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.

B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：０５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５６

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)

when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.

Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.

451

Technical Information

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：１０

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５７

Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.

452

Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：１８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５８

Table of Contents

Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act＊
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
382 .
＊

Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive

Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.

453

Technical Information

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.

crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：２８

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４５９

Table of Contents

Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.

Ignition Timing Control System

This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.

The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.

454

Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work
together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Acura replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：３６

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６０

Table of Contents

Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER

Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.

Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.

455

Technical Information

The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：４３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６１

Table of Contents

State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.

If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.

456

Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：４７

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６２

Table of Contents

State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
the highway in D. Do not use the
cruise control. When traffic allows,
drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal.
(Vehicle speed may vary slightly;
this is okay.) If you cannot do this
for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive
for at least 30 seconds, then repeat
it two more times (for a total of 90
seconds).

Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.

Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.

Technical Information

457

Main Menu

０６／０８／０２

１１：０１：５３

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６４

Main Menu

Warranty and Customer Relations

459

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Service
Information ................................. 460
Warranty Coverages ..................... 461
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 462
Authorized Manuals ...................... 463

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：０１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６５

Table of Contents

Customer Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact the Acura
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238

460

Canadian Owners:
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 444 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：１１

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６６

Table of Contents

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:

Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up

to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −

Acura accessories are covered under
this warranty. Time and mileage
limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty manual for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Acura

replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides

coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Acura warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.

461

Warranty and Customer Relations

New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：１５

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６７

Table of Contents

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.

462

If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Acura Automobile Division,
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.

０６／１１／０８

１０：００：４４

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６８

Table of Contents

Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Form Description

Price
Each＊
$75.00
$50.00

2007 Acura MDX Service Manual
2007 Acura MDX
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
61STX30
$44.00
2007 Acura MDX
Body Repair Manual
31STX601
$40.00
2007 Acura MDX Owner’s Manual
31STX800
$30.00
2007 Acura MDX
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
31STXM00
$12.00
2007 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal
31STXQ00
$15.00
2007 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide
ACU-R
FREE
Order Form for Previous Years
Indicate Year and Model Desired
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
VEHICLE MODEL

２
０
０
７

PUBLICATION NUMBER

Price

Total

Each＊

Price

Qty
Name

Year

Ａ
Ｃ
Ｕ
＊

Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.

TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE

$6.95

GRAND TOTAL

463

Authorized Manuals

Publication
Form Number
61STX00
61STX00EL

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Acura dealer.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：３３

Main Menu

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４６９

Table of Contents

Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.

Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ

Customer Name

Attention

Street Address − No P.O. Box Number

Apartment Number

City

State & Zip Code

Daytime Telephone Number

Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ

(

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.

)

Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card

VISA

Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.

Account Number

Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

DATE

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

464

Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：３８

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７０

Main Menu

Index
A

B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 65, 430
Jump Starting ............................. 426
Maintenance ............................... 415
Specifications ............................. 447
Before Driving ............................... 315
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 20
Beverage Holders .......................... 161
Booster Seats ................................... 55
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 349

Break-in, New Linings .............. 316
Fluid ............................................ 395
Bulb Replacement ..................... 400
Parking ........................................ 151
System Indicator .................. 65, 432
Wear Indicators ......................... 348
Braking System.............................. 348
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 316
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 123
Brights, Headlights ....................... 118
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 401
Brake Lights............................... 400
Front Parking Lights ................. 398
Front Side Marker Lights......... 398
Headlights .................................. 397
Rear Bulbs .................................. 400
Specifications ............................. 447
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 398
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 397
INDEX

Accessories and Modifications .... 322
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 129
Accessory Power Sockets............. 164
AC Power Outlet ............................ 165
Active Damper System ................. 353
Acura Link ...................................... 303
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 388
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 24
Air Conditioning System ............... 168
Rear A/C Control ...................... 173
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 175
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 410
Antifreeze ....................................... 390
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator Light ..................... 66, 349
Operation .................................... 349
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 231
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 129
Audio System ................. 178, 179, 198
Auto Control Mode, Starting
Engine ......................................... 331
Automatic Climate Control........... 168

Automatic Lighting........................ 119
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22
Automatic Speed Control.............. 266
Automatic Transmission............... 333
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 446
Checking Fluid Level ................ 393
Shifting ........................................ 333
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 333
Shift Lever Positions ................. 334
Shift Lock Release ..................... 338

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：４３

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７１

Main Menu

Index
C
Cancel Button................................. 268
Capacities Chart............................. 446
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58
Cargo Area Light ........................... 158
Cargo Hook .................................... 327
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 324
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
Certification Label ......................... 444
Chains, Tires .................................. 414
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 419
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 388
When to....................................... 375
Charging System Indicator .... 65, 430
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 330
Childproof Door Locks ................. 131
Child Safety ...................................... 37
Booster Seats ............................... 55
Child Seats .............................. 42, 45
Important Safety Reminders ...... 40
Infants ........................................... 42
Larger Children ........................... 54
LATCH.......................................... 47
Risks with Airbags....................... 38

Small Children.............................. 43
Tether ........................................... 51
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 38
Child Seats ........................................ 45
LATCH Anchorage Points ......... 47
Tether Anchorage Points ..... 52, 53
Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 403
Climate Control System ................ 168
Clock ............................................... 232
Code, Audio System ...................... 231
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 453
Compact Spare Tire....................... 418
Console Compartment .................. 162
Consumer Information＊................ 460
Controls, Instruments and .............. 61
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 390
Checking ..................................... 320
Proper Solution .......................... 390
Temperature Gauge .................... 72
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 453
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 70
Cruise Control Operation ............. 266
Cup Holders.................................... 161
Customer Service Office .............. 460

Customize Settings .......................... 83
Door/Window Setup ................. 105
Lighting Setup............................ 100
Meter Setup .................................. 89
Position Setup............................... 97
Setting to Default ......................... 86
Wiper Setup ................................ 113

D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 62
Daytime Running Lights............... 120
Dead Battery .................................. 426
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 462
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 122
Defrosting the Windows ............... 172
Differential Fluid ........................... 446
Dimensions ..................................... 446
Dimming the Headlights .............. 118
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 393
Engine Oil ................................... 320
Directional Signals ........................... 67
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 348
Disc Care ........................................ 227

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：４８

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７２

Main Menu

Index
Disc Changer ......................... 188, 216
Disc Changer Error
Messages ............................ 197, 226
Disc Player ............................. 188, 216
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 389
Doors
Locking and Unlocking ............. 130
Lockout Prevention ................... 131
Monitor ......................................... 11
Power Door Locks ..................... 130
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 448
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 329
Economy ..................................... 316
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 155
DVD Player Error Messages ....... 261
DVD Player .................................... 236

Speed Limiter ............................. 338
Starting........................................ 331
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 453
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 58
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 454
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 18

F
Fan, Interior.................................... 171
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 167
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 317
Filters
Oil ................................................ 388
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 122
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 419
Floor Mats ...................................... 404
INDEX

Economy, Fuel ............................... 316
Emergencies................................... 417
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 426
Brake System Indicator ............ 432
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 419

Charging System Indicator ...... 430
Checking the Fuses................... 437
Driving with a Flat Tire ............ 418
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 122
Jump Starting ............................. 426
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 430
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 431
Overheated Engine ................... 428
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ................................. 433
Towing ........................................ 433
Emergency Brake .......................... 151
Emergency Flashers ..................... 122
Emergency Towing ....................... 433
Emissions Controls........................ 453
Engine
Check Starting System ............. 332
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 72
If it Won’t Start .......................... 425
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 65, 431
Oil Life ........................................ 375
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 65, 430
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 387
Overheating................................ 428
Specifications ............................. 447

CONTINUED

III

１１：０２：５３

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７３

０６／０８／０２

Main Menu

Index
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 393
Brake ........................................... 395
Power Steering........................... 396
Windshield Washer ................... 392
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 203
Fog Lights ...................................... 120
Folding the Second Seat ............... 142
Folding the Third Seat .................. 143
Four-way Flashers ......................... 122
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 27
Front Seat ....................................... 140
Adjusting..................................... 140
Airbags ...................................... 9, 27
Heaters........................................ 146
Fuel .................................................. 316
Fill Door and Cap....................... 317
Gauge ............................................ 72
Octane Requirement ................. 316
Opening the Fuel Fill Door
Manually ................................. 433
Oxygenated ................................ 316
Reserve Indicator......................... 71
Tank, Filling the......................... 317
Tighten Fuel Cap ....................... 318

Fuses, Checking the ...................... 437

G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 321
Gasoline .......................................... 316
Gauge ............................................ 72
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 71
Octane Requirement ................. 316
Tank, Refueling ......................... 317
Gas Station Procedures................. 317
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 72
Fuel ................................................ 72
Speedometer ................................ 72
Tachometer .................................. 72
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 356
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 356
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 334
Glove Box ....................................... 162
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 356

H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 397
HandsFreeLinkTM ........................... 276
HFL Buttons............................... 277
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 122
Headlights ...................................... 118
Aiming ......................................... 397
Automatic Lighting ................... 118
Daytime Running Lights .......... 120
High Beam Indicator ................... 70
High Beams, Turning on .......... 118
Lights On Indicator ..................... 70
Low Beams, Turning on ........... 118
Reminder Chime........................ 118
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 397
Turning on .................................. 118
Washers ...................................... 117
Headphones.................................... 262
Head Restraints ............................. 141
Heated Mirror ................................ 154
Heaters, Seats ................................ 146
Heating and Cooling ...................... 168
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 118
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 272

０６／０８／０２

１１：０２：５９

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７４

Main Menu

Index
Hood, Opening the ........................ 319
Horn................................................. 115

Interior Lights ................................ 157
Introduction ......................................... i

J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 422
Jack, Tire ........................................ 419
Jump Starting ................................. 426

K
Keys ................................................. 126
Keyless Memory Settings ............ 139

L
Label, Certification ........................ 444
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 118
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 15, 21
Light Control Switch ..................... 157
INDEX

Identification Number, Vehicle.... 444
Ignition
Keys............................................. 126
Switch .......................................... 129
Timing Control System ............. 331
Immobilizer System....................... 128
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 63
Active Damper System ....... 71, 353
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 66
A/T Temp..................................... 68
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 65, 432
Brake Lamp .......................... 65, 432
Charging System ................. 65, 430
Cruise Control .............................. 70
Cruise Main .................................. 70
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 70
Fog Lights .................................... 70
High Beam .................................... 70

Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 69
Lights On ...................................... 70
Low Fuel ....................................... 71
Low Oil Pressure ................. 65, 430
Low Tire Pressure ....................... 68
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 431
Security System ........................... 71
Side Airbag Off ............................ 66
Seat Belt ........................................ 64
SH-AWD ............................... 69, 340
SRS ................................................ 66
System Message .................... 68, 80
Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 68
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 67
VSA Activation ............................. 67
VSA System .................................. 67
Individual Map Lights ................... 158
Infant Restraint ................................ 42
Infant Seats ....................................... 42
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 409
Inside Mirror .................................. 152
Inspection, Tire .............................. 411
Instrument Panel ......................... 4, 63
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 123
Interface Dial ......................... 198, 303

CONTINUED

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：０５

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７５

Main Menu

Index
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 397
Indicator ........................................ 63
Interior ........................................ 157
Parking ........................................ 118
Load Limit .............................. 325, 356
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 129
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 129
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 317
Glove Box ................................... 162
Lockout Prevention ................... 131
Power Door ................................ 130
Tailgate ............................... 131, 132
Low Coolant Level ......................... 320
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 71
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 65, 430
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 446
Luggage, Storing (cargo) ............. 324

Record ................................. 383, 384
Safety........................................... 374
Schedule ..................................... 382
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 431
Memory, Driving Position ............ 155
Message Display .............................. 80
Message Indicator ........................... 68
Meters, Gauges ................................ 72
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 153
Modifications.................................. 323
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 323
Moonroof ........................................ 150
Multi-Information Display .............. 73

N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 334
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 316
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 444

M
O
Maintenance ................................... 373
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 381
Minder......................................... 375

Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 316
Odometer .......................................... 75
Odometer, Trip ................................ 75

Off-Highway Driving ..................... 369
Off-Road Precautions .................... 369
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 388
Change, When to ....................... 375
Checking Engine ....................... 320
Life, Engine ................................ 375
Pressure Indicator ............... 65, 430
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 387
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 129
Outside Mirrors ............................. 153
Outside Temperature ...................... 76
Overheating, Engine ..................... 428
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 381
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 316

P
Panel Brightness Control ............. 123
Park Gear Position......................... 334
Parking ............................................ 342
Parking Brake ................................ 151
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 65, 432
Parking Lights................................ 118

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：１０

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７６

Main Menu

Index
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 342
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 34
PGM-FI System.............................. 454
Power Seat Adjustments ............... 140
Power Socket Locations................ 160
Power Windows ............................. 147
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Protecting Children ......................... 37
General Guidelines ...................... 37
Protecting Infants ........................ 42
Protecting Larger Children ........ 54
Protecting Small Children .......... 43
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 51
Using LATCH .............................. 47

Rotation, Tire ................................. 412

S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 20
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 462
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Door Locks ................................... 11
Head Restraints ........................... 14
Seat Belts .................................. 8, 15
Seats & Seat-Backs ................ 12, 13
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 59
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Satellite Radio, XM ................ 183, 208

INDEX

Radiator Overheating .................... 428
Radio/Disc Sound System.... 179, 199
Readiness Codes ............................ 456
Rear A/C Unit ................................ 173
Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 237

Rear Entertainment System ......... 233
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 400
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 314
Rear View Mirror........................... 152
Rear Window Defogger ................ 172
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ........................................ 117
Reclining the Seat Backs .............. 140
Reclining the Second Seats .......... 142
Reminder Indicators ........................ 64
Remote Audio Controls................. 229
Remote Control (RES) .................. 238
Remote Transmitter ...................... 135
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 388
Fuses ........................................... 437
Light Bulbs ................................. 397
Schedule ..................................... 375
Timing Belt ................................. 396
Tires ............................................ 412
Wiper Blades .............................. 405
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 23
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 320
Restraint, Child ................................ 37
Reverse Gear Position................... 334

CONTINUED

VII

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：１３

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７７

Main Menu

Index
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 15
Additional Information ................ 20
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Cleaning ...................................... 403
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Maintenance ................................. 23
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 20, 64
System Components.................... 20
Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Seats ................................................ 140
Adjusting the Second Seat ........ 142
Folding the Second Seat ........... 142
Folding the Third Seat .............. 143
Head Restraints ......................... 141
Heaters........................................ 146
Position Memory ....................... 155
Third Row Access ..................... 143
Security System ............................. 265
Sensors
Driver’s Seat Position Sensor ..... 29
Front Passenger’s Weight
Sensors...................................... 29
Impact Sensors....................... 25, 26

VIII

Sequential SportShift Mode ......... 335
Serial Number ................................ 444
Service Intervals ............................ 375
Service Manual＊ ............................ 463
Service Station Procedures .......... 317
SH-AWD ......................................... 340
Indicator ........................................ 69
Torque Distribution Monitor ... 340
Shifting the Automatic
Transmission .............................. 333
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 333
Shift Lock Release ......................... 338
Side Airbags ..................................... 30
Off Indicator ................................. 34
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 32
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement in .......................... 398
Signaling Turns ................................ 67
Snow Tires ...................................... 414
Sound System......................... 179, 199
Spare Tire
Inflating............................... 410, 418
Specifications ............................. 447
Specifications Charts..................... 446
Speed Limiter ................................. 338
Speed Control ................................. 266

Speedometer .................................... 72
SRS, Additional Information........... 26
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Airbag System Components ....... 24
Airbag Service .............................. 35
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 33
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 27
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 32
SRS Indicator.............................. 33, 66
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 129
Starting the Engine........................ 331
Auto Control Mode.................... 331
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 332
With a Dead Battery ................. 425
State Emissions Testing ............... 453
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 428
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................. 124
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 129
Buttons ....................... 229, 266, 277
Position Memory ....................... 155
Stereo Sound System .... 178, 179, 198

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：１８

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７８

Main Menu

Index
Storage Compartment ................... 162
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 416
Sun Visor......................................... 164
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 35
SRS Indicator.......................... 33, 66
System Components.................... 24
Synthetic Oil ................................... 388
T

Tire Chains ................................. 414
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 419
Torque Distribution Monitor
(SH-AWD) .................................. 340
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 355
Emergency Wrecker ................. 433
Equipment and Accessories ..... 361
Weight Limit .............................. 356
Trailer Loading .......................... 356
Trailer Stability Assist ............... 368
Trailer Towing Tips .................. 364
Trailer Stability Assist ................... 368
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 393
Fluid Selection............................ 394
Identification Number............... 444
Shifting the Automatic .............. 333
Treadwear ...................................... 411
Trip Computer ................................. 78
Trip Meter ........................................ 75
Turn Signals ..................................... 67
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 419
CONTINUED

INDEX

Tachometer ...................................... 72
Tailgate ........................................... 131
Opening the ................................ 131
Open Monitor ............................... 11
Power .......................................... 132
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 400
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 417
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 448
Emissions Control Systems ...... 453
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 455
Temperature Gauge ........................ 72
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 177
Temperature, Outside ..................... 76

Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 22
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 51
Theft Protection, Radio................. 231
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 455
Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel .. 124
Timing Belt ..................................... 396
Tire Chains ..................................... 414
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 419
Tire Labeling .................................. 450
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 343, 451
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 68, 343
Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 77, 343
Tires ................................................ 409
Air Pressure ............................... 409
Checking Wear .......................... 411
Compact Spare ........................... 418
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 448
Inflation ....................................... 409
Inspection ................................... 411
Maintenance ............................... 411
Replacing .................................... 412
Rotating....................................... 412
Snow ............................................ 414
Specifications ............................. 447

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：２２

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４７９

Main Menu

Index
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 417
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 448
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 316
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 389

V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 164
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 325
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 446
Vehicle Identification Number..... 444
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 351
VSA System Indicator ... 67, 81, 351
VSA Activation
Indicator ..................... 67, 81, 351
VSA Off Switch .......................... 352
Vehicle Storage .............................. 416
Ventilation ...................................... 175
VIN .................................................. 444
Viscosity, Oil................................... 387

W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 59
Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 461
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 392
Level Indicator ............................. 71
Operation .................................... 116
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 124
Alignment and Balance ............. 412
Aluminum Alloy Wheels ........... 408
Cleaning ...................................... 408
Compact Spare ........................... 418
Wrench, Nut ............................... 421
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 148
Operating the Power ................. 147
Rear, Defogger .......................... 122
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 116
Defroster .................................... 172
Washers ...................................... 116
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 405

Operation .................................... 116
Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer .................................... 117
Worn Tires ..................................... 411
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 433

X
XM Satellite Radio ................. 183, 208
＊

: U.S. only

０６／０８／０２

１１：０３：４０

３１ＳＴＸ６００

０４８１

Main Menu

Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
21.00 US gal (79.5 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 387 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
394 ).

Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement.

Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 395 ).

Capacity:
SH-AWD differential case
2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Transfer Assembly Fluid:
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
hypoid gear oil, API service
classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 396 ).

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2013:11:27 10:58:18-08:00
Creator                         : MDXmainindex.doc - Microsoft Word
Modify Date                     : 2013:12:02 11:30:31-08:00
Title                           : 
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2013:12:02 11:30:31-08:00
Creator Tool                    : MDXmainindex.doc - Microsoft Word
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:2d3055c8-bee3-4c29-b6c0-2ed400481155
Instance ID                     : uuid:fa75d9cf-3182-487a-abec-b0f50f152292
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro 10.1.3
Page Count                      : 479

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Owners Manual Pdf TX0707OM

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation